Boston Public Library

Boston, HA 021 IS
 Second Edition

Jean Yates, M.A.

George Washington University

BARRON’S
© Copyright 2006, 1996 by Jean Yates

All rights reserved.

No part of this book may be reproduced in any form,
by photostat, microfilm, xerography, or any other means,
or incorporated into any information retrieval system,
electronic or mechanical, without the written permission
of the copyright owner.

All inquiries should be addressed to:

Barron’s Educational Series, Inc.
250 Wireless Boulevard
Hauppauge, New York 11788
www.barronseduc.com

Library of Congress Control Number: 2006015564

ISBN-13: 978-0-7641-3546-0
ISBN-10: 0-7641-3546-5

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Yates, Jean.
Master the basics—English / Jean Yates. — 2nd ed.
p. cm. — (Master the basics series)
Includes index.
ISBN-13: 978-0-7641-3546-0
ISBN-10: 0-7641-3546-5
1. English language—Textbooks for foreign speakers. 2. English
language—Grammar—Problems, exercises, etc. I.Title. II. Series.
PE1128.Y36 2006
428.2'4—dc22 2006015564

Printed in the United States of America

9 8 7 6 5 4 3
Contents
Preface ix
How to Use This Book x
Find Out What You Know 1
Pretest 3
Answers to Pretest 11
Diagnostic Analysis 14

GRAMMAR

The Basics
§1. Letters and Words 17
§2. Capitalization 20
§3. Punctuation 21
§4. Sentences 23
§4.1 The Sentence 23
§4.1-1 The Subject 23
§4.1-2 The Predicate 24
§4.2 Sentence Patterns 25
§4.3 Types of Sentences 25
§4.3-1 Declarative 25
§4.3-2 Interrogative 25
§4.3-3 Exclamatory 27
§4.3-4 Imperative 28

The Parts of Speech

§5. Nouns 29
§5.1 Countable Nouns 29
§5.1-1 Singular Nouns 29
§5.1-2 Plural Nouns 30
§5.2 Non-Count Nouns 32
§5.2-1 Common Examples 32
§5.2-2 Using Non-Count Nouns 34
§5.2-3 Nouns That Can Be Count
or Non-Count 35
§5.3 Proper Nouns 35
§5.4 Appositives 36
§5.5 Possessive Nouns 36
§5.5-1 “Whose?” 36
§5.5-2 Using Possessive Nouns 37
 §5.6 Comparing Nouns 38
§5.6-1 Comparing Nouns by Number or
Amount 38
§5.6-2 Expressing Equality of Size,
Weight, Shape, and Color 40
§5.6-3 Expressing Absolute Equality 40
§5.6-4 The Same + Noun 41
§6. Pronouns 42
§6.1 Subject Pronouns 42
§6.2 Object Pronouns 43
§6.2-1 Direct Object Pronouns 43
§6.2-2 Object-of-Preposition Pronouns 44
§6.2-3 Indirect Object Pronouns 44
§6.2-4 Using Two Object
Pronouns Together 45
§6.3 Reciprocal Pronouns 45
§6.4 Intensive and Reflexive Pronouns 46
§6.4-1 Intensive Pronouns 46
§6.4-2 Reflexive Pronouns 46
§6.5 Possessive Pronouns 47
§6.6 Relative Pronouns 48
§6.7 Demonstrative Pronouns 48
§6.7-1 Indicating a Specific Noun 48
§6.7-2 Using One 49
§6.8 Indefinite Pronouns 49
§6.8-1 Singular Indefinite Pronouns 49
§6.8-2 Plural Indefinite Pronouns 51
§6.8-3 Non-Count Indefinite Pronouns 52
§6.8-4 Another/ The Other / Others 53
§7. Adjectives 54
§7.1 Noun Determiners 55
§7.1-1 Articles—a, an, the 55
§7.1-2 Numbers 59
§7.1-3 Possessive Adjectives 60
§7.1-4 Demonstrative Adjectives 60
§7.1-5 More Noun Determiners 61
§7.2 Descriptive Adjectives 63
§7.2-1 Proper Descriptive Adjectives 64
§7.2-2 Nouns Used as Adjectives 64
§7.2-3 Verbs Used as Adjectives 65
§7.2-4 Prepositions Used as Adjectives 65
§7.2-5 Compound Adjectives 66
 §7.2-6 Comparing Descriptive
Adjectives 66
§7.2-7 Superlative Adjectives 70
§7.3 Order of Adjectives 71
§8. Verbs—Introduction 73
§9. Verbs—Present Time 75
§9.1 Present Tense 75
§9.1-1 The Verb Be 75
§9.1-2 The Present Tense of Verbs
Other than Be 78
§9.1-3 Modal Auxiliaries in the
Present Tense 85
§9.2 Present Progressive Tense 90
§9.2-1 Separated Progressive Forms 91
§9.2-2 Non-Progressive Verbs 92
§9.3 Present Perfect Tense 95
§9.4 Present Perfect Progressive Tense 97
§10. Verbs—Past Time 98
§10.1 Past Tense 98
§10.1-1 The Past Tense of Be 98
§10.1-2 The Past Tense of All Verbs
Other than Be 99
§10.1-3 Modals in the Past 100
§10.2 Past Progressive Tense 101
§10.2-1 Separated Progressive Forms 102
§10.2-2 Non-Progressive Verbs in
the Past 102
§10.2-3 Was Going To... 105
§10.3 Used To... 105
§10.4 Would 105
§10.5 Past Perfect Tense 106
§10.6 Past Perfect Progressive Tense 107
§11. Verbs—Future Time 108
§11.1 Present Progressive Used for
the Future 108
§11.2 Be Going To... 108
§11.3 Will and Other Modal Auxiliaries 109
§11.4 Present Tense Used for the Future 111
§11.5 Future Progressive Tense 111
§11.6 Future Perfect Tense 112
§11.7 Future Perfect Progressive Tense 112
§12. Verbs--Additional Patterns 113
§12.1 Verbs Used as Nouns 113
§12.1-1 The Gerund Form 113
§12.1-2 The Infinitive Form 114
§12.1-3 Gerunds vs. Infinitives 116
§12.2 Quoted and Reported Speech 119
§12.3 Included Questions and Statements 121
§12.4 Tag Questions 122
§12.5 Using Verbs with Indirect Objects 124
§13. Verbs—Special Usage 126
§14. Verbs—Passive Voice 132
§15. Verbs—Imperative Mood 134
§15.1 Instructions, Suggestions, or Commands 134
§15.1-1 Suggestions That Include
the Speaker 135
§15.1-2 More Formal Suggestions 135
§15.2 You to Mean “Anybody” 135
§15.3 Indirect Commands 136
§16. Verbs—Subjunctive Mood 137
§16.1 Present Subjunctive 137
§16.2 Past Subjunctive 138
§16.3 Perfect Subjunctive 139
§16.4 Subjunctive vs. Indicative after If 140
§17. Prepositions 141
§17.1 Prepositions that Indicate Place 141
§17.2 Prepositions that Indicate Direction 143
§17.3 Prepositions that Indicate Time 144
§17.4 Prepositions that Indicate Other
Relationships 145
§17.5 Asking Questions with Prepositions 146
§17.6 Prepositions Combined with Nouns,
Adjectives, and Verbs 147
§17.7 Prepositions Following Verbs 159
§17.7-1 Intransitive Verb-Preposition
Combinations 159
§17.7-2 Transitive Verb-Preposition
Combinations 160
§18. Adverbs 170
§18.1 Adverbs of Location 170
§18.2 Adverbs of Time 171
 §18.3 Adverbs of Instance 174
§18.4 Adverbs of Frequency 174
§18.5 Adverbs of Manner 175
§18.6 Comparing Adverbs of Manner 176
§18.7 Adverbs that Intensify Verbs 178
§18.8 Adverbs that Intensify Adjectives
and Other Adverbs 179

§19. Conjunctions 180

§19.1 Coordinating Conjunctions 180
§19.1-1 Joining Independent Clauses 181
§19.2 Correlative Conjunctions 183
§19.3 Subordinating Conjunctions 184

§20. Discourse Markers 186

§20.1 Expressing Chronological Order 186
§20.2 Making an Argument More Convincing 187
§20.3 Illustrating Previous Information 189
§20.4 Contradicting Previous Information 189
§20.5 Correcting Previous Information 191
§20.6 Indicating the Consequences of
an Action 191
§20.7 Explaining Previous Information 191
§20.8 Reducing the Importance of
Previous Information 192
§20.9 Verifying Previous Information 193
§20.10 Expressing Reasons for an Action 193
§20.11 Expressing Concession or Condition 194
§20.12 Summarizing 195

Special Topics
§21. Numbers 197
§21.1 Whole Numbers 197
§21.2 Fractions 199
§21.3 Decimals 200

§22. Days and Dates 201

§23. Telling Time 203

§24. Talking About the Weather 205

Let’s Review 207
Test Yourself 209
Answers 288

APPENDIX
Weights and Measures 327
Common Abbreviations 329
Irregular Verb Forms 330

Index 333
Preface
This book, designed especially for students of English as
a Second Language, is one of Barron’s series of grammar
reference guides. It presents the essentials of English
grammar in an easy-to-read outline form, and provides
numerous examples of each aspect of English structure.
The basics—from the mechanics of capitalization and
punctuation, to the patterns of nouns, pronouns, adjectives,
verbs, prepositions, adverbs, and conjunctions—are
explained clearly and simply. A pre-test at the beginning of
the book will help you determine what grammar you already
know well, and what areas you need to study further. In
addition, there are short tests at the end of the book that
will help you put into practice what you have learned, and
reinforce the language patterns you have mastered.

IX
How to Use This Book
Look through the book and become familiar with the con-
tents and numbering system of topics. This system—the
symbol § + a number + a decimal number—is devised to
allow you to easily refer to any topic or sub-topic and to
cross-reference it with the tests and the index. You will see
that each major section is identified in the Table of Contents
by an § + a number. All references to this topic have the
same § number throughout the book—in the pretest, in its
own chapter in the text, in other sections that deal with
related topics, in the exercise section, and in the index. If
you are reading about a verb tense, for example, you will
note that its usage is closely linked to certain adverbs. The
§ number will refer you to the proper adverb section for
more thorough study.
Take the pretest, check your answers, and fill in the
diagnostic analysis chart to pinpoint your strong and weak
areas.
Start anywhere you wish. You can start with Section 1
and work straight through to the end; you can start with
what you already know well, as a review; or you can start
with the topics that you need to work on.
It is also up to you to decide when to do the tests. You
may wish to do each test right after studying the corre-
sponding section, or you can wait until you finish, and do
all the tests at once. If you do the tests twice, you will get
twice the benefit!

x
FIND OUT WHAT
YOU KNOW
Pretest
§2 Write capital letters where necessary:

1. miss smith moved to new york on Wednesday,

december the twelfth.

§3 Punctuate the following sentence, and write capital

letters where necessary:

2. becky my sister who studied in California is now

staying in nancys apartment

§4 Identify the parts of the following sentence:

My friend gave us three tickets.

3. The subject is .

4. The predicate is .

5. The direct object is .

6. The indirect object is .

§5 Write the plural form of the following nouns:

7. man

8. lady

9. boy

10. girl

11. child

Complete the sentence with the correct noun:

12. There is one in that family.

people child children

3
4 Find Out What You Know

13. We have too much .

work friends noises

14. I need a new .

information computer discs

§6 Change the underlined nouns to pronouns:

15. Sue and Carolyn took Bob’s car home.

16. Tony and I wanted to take the flowers to my

mother.

§7 Choose the correct adjectives for the following

sentences:

17. She has information.

a few a little many

18. He has a job at a store.

shoes shoe men

19. lam in this book; it looks very

interested interesting

20. That show is not suitable for

a child.
three-years-old three-year-old three years

21. We have bills.

too many too much a little

§9 Fill in the blanks with the correct verb form:

22. John (need) an apartment

now.

23. No, he (not/have) a place to

live.

24. Right now he (watch)

television.

25. He always (watch) television

at night.
 Pretest 5

26. No, he (not/have to/work) at

night.

27. He (work) a salesman for two

years.

28-33. Write a question for each of the above

statements (22-27).
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.

§10 Fill in the blanks with the correct verb form:

34. 1 (finish) my report a week

ago.

35. No, he (not/go) to Greece last

year.

36. We (should/study) yesterday.

37. She was hungry at lunchtime, because she

(not/eat) breakfast.

38. While 1 (drive) to the city, 1 ran

out of gas.

39-43. Write a question for each of the above

statements (34-38).
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.

§11 Rewrite the following sentences using a future

expression:

44. I plan to work tomorrow.

6 Find Out What You Know

45. There is a 50 percent possibility that John will

move to California next month.

46. I promise to call you soon.

47. My friend refuses to go.

§12 Fill in the blanks with the correct form—the gerund or

the infinitive:

48. You promised (call) me.

49. He enjoys (play) the piano.

50. She is used to (wear) glasses.

51. He used (wear) glasses.

Change the following direct quotes to reported speech:

52. “She is beautiful,” said my brother.

53. “Do you want to meet her?” I asked him.

Change the following sentence to a direct quote:

54. Joe said he had been there before.

Change each question to a statement beginning with “I

don’t know”:

55. Who is she?

56. What does she want?

 Pretest 7

§13 Choose the correct verb to complete the sentences:

57. Will you me five dollars?

borrow lend

58. Please f Patricia to help you.

ask ask for

59. Are you to my party?

coming going

60. Yes, 1 am to your party.

coming going

61. Please don’t anything to his

sister.
say tell

62. She always her friends.

says tells

§14 Change these sentences from the active voice to the

passive voice:

63. They made this blouse in China.

64. Somebody wrote this letter a long time ago.

§15 Give the command:

65. Tell Karen to call you.

66. Tell Wayne not to be late.

67. Suggest to the children that you play a game.

§16 Combine each pair of sentences into one sentence,

beginning with I wish:

68. I don’t have a car. I want a car.

8 Find Out What You Know

69. They didn’t call me. I am sorry.

Combine each pair of sentences into one sentence,

beginning with if:

70. I don’t have time. I want to visit you.

71. I didn’t have time. I wanted to visit you.

§17 Write in the correct prepositions:

72. My house is Columbus.

73. It is Maple Avenue.

74. It is number 702.

75. We go to work bus.

76. This desk is made wood.

77. He has been absent school

three times.

78. We aren’t prepared the test.

79. He is always thinking his

girlfriend.

80. Are you afraid the dark?

81. She is married my cousin.

82. The picnic was called becau

of rain.

83. He has to aet his anger.

84. 1 am content that.

85. Her dress is similar mine.

86. Is he qualified this job?

 Pretest 9

§18 Replace the words in parentheses with an adverb:

87. I saw her three years (before now)

88. She called me (the week before this week)

Write the correct form of the adverb in the blank:

89. Steve runs (fast) than Jim.

90. Helen paints (carefully) than

Suzanne.

91. Charles works (well) of all.

§19 Fill in the blanks with conjunctions:

92. Katherine likes swimming not

diving.

93. Andrew brought a hammer

nails.

94. Robin got up early she would

get to our eight o’clock class on time.

95. I got up early, too; , I didn’t get

there on time.

96. Terry slept until nine o’clock; ,

he didn’t get to class on time either.

§20 Fill in each blank with the most appropriate word or

expression:

97. To operate this machine, first, push the “start”

button. , set the clock.
After Next Also Besides

98. You should accept that job. It pays well.

, it offers great benefits.
Plus However On the other hand Still
10 Find Out What You Know

99. She doesn’t work here. , I’ve

never heard of her.
Instead Nevertheless Plus As a matter of fact

100. If I get the job I’ll buy an apartment.

, I’ll look for a room to rent.
However Instead Otherwise Consequently

§21 Write the following amount as it should be read or

said:

101. $48,823.92

§22 Write the following calendar year as it should be read

or said:

102. 1996

§23 Write the time indicated on the clock as it should be

read or said:

104. 30°F is .
cold weather pleasant weather hot weather
Answers to Pretest
1. Miss Smith moved to New York on Wednesday,
December the twelfth.
2. Becky, my sister who studied in California, is now
staying in Nancy’s apartment.
3. My friend
4. gave
5. three tickets
6. us
7. men
8. ladies
9. boys
10. girls
11. children
12. child
13. work
14. computer
15. They his
16. We them her
17. a little
18. shoe
19. interested interesting
20. three-year-old
21. too many
22. needs
23. does not have / doesn’t have
24. is watching
25. watches
26. does not have to work / doesn’t have to work
27. has worked / has been working
28. What does John need?
29. Does he have a place to live?
30. What is he doing?
31. When does he watch television? / What does he do
at night?
32. Does he have to work at night?
33. How long has he worked as a salesman? / How long
has he been working as a salesman?
34. finished
35. did not go / didn’t go
36. should have studied

11
12 Find Out What You Know

37. had not eaten / hadn’t eaten

38. was driving
39. When did you finish your report?
40. Did he go to Greece last year?
41. What should you have done yesterday? / When
should you have studied?
42. Why was she hungry?
43. When did you run out of gas? / What happened while
you were driving to the city?
44. I am going to work tomorrow. /1 am working tomorrow.
45. John may move to California next month. / John might
move to California next month. / Maybe John will
move to California next month.
46. I will call you soon. / I’ll call you soon.
47. My friend won’t go. / My friend will not go.
48. to call
49. playing
50. wearing
51. to wear
52. My brother said she was beautiful. / My brother said
that she was beautiful.
53. I asked him if he wanted to meet her.
54. Joe said, “I’ve been there before.” / “I have been there
before,” said Joe.
55. I don’t know who she is.
56. I don’t know what she wants.
57. lend
58. ask
59. coming
60. coming
61. say
62. tells
63. This blouse was made in China.
64. This letter was written a long time ago.
65. Call me, Karen.
66. Don’t be late, Wayne.
67. Let’s play a game!
68. I wish I had a car.
69. I wish they had called me.
70. If I had time, I would visit you.
71. If I had had time, I would have visited you.
72. in
73. on
74. at
75. by
76. of
 Answers to Pretest 13

77. from
78. for
79. about/of
80. of
81. to
82. off
83. over
84. with
85. to
86. for
87. ago
88. last week
89. faster
90. more carefully
91. the best
92. but
93. and
94. so that
95. however / nevertheless
96. therefore
97. Next
98. Plus
99. As a matter of fact
100. Otherwise
101. forty-eight thousand, eight hundred and twenty-three
dollars and ninety-two cents
102. nineteen ninety-six
103. six-oh-five / five after six / five past six
104. cold weather
14 Find Out What You Know

DIAGNOSTIC ANALYSIS
Number of Answers
Section Question Numbers Correct Incorrect
§2. Capitalization 1
§3. Punctuation 2
§4. Sentences 3, 4, 5, 6
§5. Nouns 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14
§6. Pronouns 15, 16
§7. Adjectives 17, 18, 19, 20, 21
§9. Verbs—Present Time 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27,
28, 29, 30, 31,32, 33
§10. Verbs—Past Time 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
40, 41,42, 43
§11. Verbs—Future Time 44, 45, 46, 47
§12. Verbs—Additional 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53,
Patterns 54, 55, 56
§13. Verbs—Special Usage 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62
§14. Verbs—Passive Voice 63, 64
§15. Verbs—Imperative
Mood 65, 66, 67
§16. Verbs—Subjunctive
Mood 68, 69, 70, 71
§17. Prepositions 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78,
79, 80, 81,82, 83, 84, 85,
86
§18. Adverbs 87, 88, 89, 90, 91
§19. Conjunctions 92, 93, 94, 95, 96
§20. Discourse Markers 97, 98, 99, 100
§21. Numbers 101
§22. Dates 102
§23. Time 103
§24. Weather 104
TOTAL QUESTIONS: 104

Use the following scale to see how you did.

95-104 correct Excellent 78-82 correct Below Average

89-94 correct Very Good Fewer than 78 Low Proficiency
83-88 correct Average correct
GRAMMAR

.
The Basics

H
Letters and Words
English has an alphabet of 5 vowel letters

a, e, i, o, u

and 21 consonant letters

b, c, d, f, g, h, j, k, I, m, n, p, q, r, s, t, v, w, x, y, z

Each word is one example of a part of speech. In

general,
nouns name people, places, and things
EXAMPLES
nurse town books

pronouns are substitutes for nouns

EXAMPLES
I you he she it we they us him her them

adjectives describe nouns

EXAMPLES
pretty tall new red

verbs define states of being or actions

EXAMPLES
is are sing have went buying gone

prepositions relate words to additional information

EXAMPLES
for of with by to in out

17
18 Grammar §1-

adverbs tell where, when, and how the action or state occurs
EXAMPLES
here today fast happily

conjunctions connect and relate various elements of a

sentence
EXAMPLES
and but so however

Abbreviations
An abbreviation is a shortened form of a word. Abbreviations
are often used in informal writing.
EXAMPLES
Mon. for Monday
Sept, for September
ch. for chapter

In formal writing, it is better not to abbreviate most

words. The above words, for example—Monday,
September, and chapter—should be written out completely.
The following words, however, are always abbreviated:

Time Expressions
A. D. anno Domini—the years counted for present time
B. C. before Christ—the years counted backward from
present time
A.M. ante meridiem— before 12 o’clock noon
12:30 A.M. = 12:30 in the morning
P.M. post meridiem—after 12 o’clock noon
12:30 P.M. = 12:30 in the afternoon

Personal Titles
Mr. the title for a man
Mr. John Jackson Mr. Jackson
Mrs. the title for a married woman
Mrs. Margaret Barnes Mrs. Barnes
Ms. the business title for a married or unmarried woman
Ms. Janice Best Ms. Best

(Miss, the title for an unmarried woman or young girl, is not

followed by a period.)
§1. Letters and Words 19

Dr. the title for a man or woman who has earned a

doctorate degree
Dr. Pat Reeves Dr. Reeves
Rev. the title for a member of the clergy
Rev. James Thurston Rev. Thurston
Sr. senior, used after a man’s name when his son has
the same name
Mr. Solomon Thomas, Sr.
Jr. junior, used after a man’s name when his father has
the same name
Mr. Solomon Thomas, Jr.

Credentials
Ph.D. Doctor of Philosophy, used after the name of a
person who has earned that degree
Sally Benson, Ph.D.
Randy Thorne, Ph.D.
M. D. Doctor of Medicine, used after the name of a medical
doctor
Cynthia Travis, M.D.
Daniel Thornton, M.D.
D.D.S. Doctor of Dental Surgery, used after the name of a
dentist
Rose Ann Smithson, D.D.S.
Dennis Hamilton, D.D.S.
LL.D. Doctor of Laws, used after the name of a lawyer who
has earned that degree
Thomas O’Neill, LL.D.
Teresa Marshall, LL.D.
Choose one title or the other:
Dr. Donald Lawrence or Donald Lawrence, M.D.

Latin Abbreviations
cf. confer— compare
e.g. exempli gratia—for example
et al. et alii— and others
etc. et cetera—and so forth
i.e. id est— that is
N. B. nota bene—note well

On an Invitation
R.S.V.P. repondez s’il vous plait—please reply
§2.
Capitalization
Each alphabet letter has two forms

Lower Case—a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, I, m, n, o, p, q, r,
s, t, u, v, w, x, y, z

Upper Case-A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P,
Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z

Upper case letters are also called capitals. Capital

letters are used for:

the first letter of the first word of a sentence

That is our house.

proper nouns and their abbreviations

We live in the United States of America.
We live in the USA.

major words in titles

Master the Basics: English

the pronoun I.

20
§3.
Punctuation
Punctuation symbols are written marks that help make
meanina clear.

The period (.) is used: at the end of most sentences

It is raining.
in many abbreviations
etc. lb. Mr.
in numbers, and is called a
decimal point
3.50 4.6 9.99

The question mark (?) at the end of a question

is used: Where is Bob?

The exclamation point at the end of an exclamation and

(!) is used: at the end of some commands
Here he is!
Come here now!

The comma (,) is used: to separate elements of a

sentence to avoid confusion
If you leave, Sam can rest.
between items in a series
1 like ice cream, cake, pie, and
all other rich desserts.
with dates
October 2,1977

with titles
Marta Ruiz, R.N.
with numbers
4,978 5,325,000

The semi-colon (;) is to separate closely related

used: independent clauses
He is my son; 1 love him.

21
22 Grammar §3.

She is my friend; besides, I

love her.
between items in a series, when
commas have already been used
I like ice cream with chocolate,
cherries, and whipped cream;
cookies, cake, and pie; and all
other rich desserts.

The colon (:) is used: to call attention to an explanation

or list
They need the following: bread,
milk, sugar, flour, and salt.

The dash (—) is used: to emphasize information within a

sentence
Everything they need—bread,
milk, sugar, flour, and salt—is
at the corner store.

Quotation marks (“ ”) to indicate exactly what someone

are used: said or wrote
Tom said, “You must be crazy!”

Parentheses () are to give another form of the same

used: expression
The Yorktown Dance Team (YDT)
Self-contained Underwater
Breathing Apparatus (scuba)

The apostrophe (’) to indicate possession

is used: Mary’s book
to form a contraction
I’m don’t haven’t they’re

The hyphen (-) is used: to connect the parts of a

compound word
seventy-eight make-up
to connect certain prefixes with
words
re-use pre-approve
 §4.
Sentences
The basic unit of written and spoken English is the
sentence. A sentence is a meaningful combination of
words. The first word of a sentence begins with a capital
letter, and the last word is followed by a period, a question
mark, or an exclamation point.
§4.1
THE A sentence is an independent clause; it
SENTENCE • has a subject—a noun and its modifiers
• has a predicate—a verb and its modifiers
• expresses a complete idea.

§4.1-1
The Subject The subject is the person, place, or thing we are talking or
writing about. It can be singular or plural.
EXAMPLES
Singular Subjects Plural Subjects
John John and Bill
He They
My house My house and my car
Swimming Swimming and diving

It is the subject for certain common expressions

(a) with the weather
It is windy.
It is snowing.
It is hot.

(b) with time

It is ten o’clock.
It is late.

(c) with distance

It is a long way.

(d) with adjectives or nouns followed by infinitives

It is nice to see you.
It is sad to say good-bye.
It is a shame to lose it.
23
24 Grammar §4.

§4.1-2
The Predicate The predicate is a verb that tells what the subject is or
does. The form of the verb must be appropriate for the
subject.
The verb can be:

4.1-2.1 LINKING

A linking verb connects the subject to a complement—a

word that describes the subject. The complement can be
a noun or adjective.
Common linking verbs are be, become, get (when it
means become), appear, seem, feel, smell, sound, and
taste.
EXAMPLES
Subject Predicate Complement
John is my brother.
My house seems empty.
Swimming sounded good.

4.1-2.2 TRANSITIVE

A transitive verb must have a direct object—a noun or

pronoun that tells whom or what the verb points to.
EXAMPLES
Subject Predicate Direct Object
John likes Susan.
My house needed an air conditioner.

4.1-2.3 TRANSITIVE WITH AN INDIRECT OBJECT

An indirect object is the person who is the receiver of the

direct object.
Common verbs that can have indirect objects are give,
show, tell, teach, buy, and send.
EXAMPLES
Indirect Direct
Subject Predicate Object Object
John gave Susan a ring.
She is telling her mother the secret.
We will send them presents.
§4- Sentences 25

4.1-2.4 INTRANSITIVE

An intransitive verb does not have an object.

EXAMPLES
Subject Predicate
John travels.
My car runs.

§4.2
SENTENCE The most common sentence patterns are:
PATTERNS
(a) Subject + Linking Verb + Noun Complement
Mary is a doctor.

(b) Subject + Linking Verb + Adjective Complement

Mary is intelligent.

(c) Subject + Transitive Verb + Direct Object

Mary helps sick people.

(d) Subject + Transitive Verb + Indirect Object + Direct Object

Mary gives sick people medicine.

(e) Subject + Intransitive Verb

Mary works.

§4.3
TYPES OF
SENTENCES

§4.3-1
Declarative A declarative sentence is a statement that gives information
or ideas. It ends with a period.
EXAMPLE
Mary helps sick people.

§4.3-2
Interrogative An interrogative sentence asks a question. It ends with a
question mark.
26 Grammar §4.

1. An interrogative sentence may begin with a question

word:

Who asks for the name of a person or people, the

subject of the answer sentence
Who is Chan? Chan is my brother.

Whom asks for the name of a person or people, the

object of the answer sentence
Whom did you talk to? I talked to Chan.

Whom is used in formal speaking and in writing.

Informally, Who is used in place of Whom.
Who did you talk to? 1 talked to Chan.

Whose asks for the name of the owner of something

Whose book is this? That is Chan’s book.

What asks for the name of a place or thing, or of

places or things
What is that? It is our garden.
What is this? It is a book.
What are Maine and
Ohio? They are states.
What are these? They are flowers.

Which asks for a choice between things

Which hat do you 1 want the red one.
want?
Which are your bags? These bags are mine.

When asks for a time

When is the party? The party is next
Saturday.
Where asks for a place
Where is the party? The party is at my
house.
Why asks for a reason
Why did you buy that? 1 bought it because
1 needed it.

What asks for a reason

...for What did you buy 1 bought it because
that for? 1 needed it.
§4. Sentences 27

How asks for a reason informally

come How come you I bought it because
bought that? I needed it.

How asks for the manner of the action

How does she drive? She drives carefully.

How asks for a number

many How many boxes are There are three
there? boxes.

How asks for an amount

much How much money There is a little money,
is there?

How + asks for the intensity of the adjective

adjective How heavy is it? It is very heavy.

How + asks for the intensity of the adverb

adverb How fast does she She types very
type? fast.

2. A question may ask for a “yes” or “no” answer.

The word order is:
Form of
Be or
Auxiliary Complement
Verb + Subject + Main Verb + or Object
Are you sick?
Is she here?
Do they like ice cream?
Does he work?

§4.3-3
Exclamatory An exclamatory sentence expresses surprise or another
emotion. It ends with an exclamation point.
Exclamatory sentences often begin with What or How.
EXAMPLES
What a beautiful dress!
How nice of you to say that!

An exclamatory sentence may be a statement spoken

with special emphasis.
28 Grammar §4-

EXAMPLES
I am hungry!
She is a wonderful teacher!
You didn’t call me!

§4.3-4
Imperative An imperative sentence is a command. It tells someone
what to do or not to do. An imperative sentence may end
with a period or an exclamation point.
The subject may be “you”—either singular or plural—but
it is not expressed.
EXAMPLES
Turn right on Oak Street.
Open the boxes.
Come here!
Drive carefully!
Don’t touch that wine!

The subject could also be “we” or “you and I”—also not

expressed.
EXAMPLES
Let’s go to the movies.
Let’s not waste time.
The Parts of Speech
§5.
Nouns
A noun is a word that names one or more people, animals,
places, things, or abstractions. Abstractions are things you
cannot touch.

A noun that names a person or people answers the

question, “Who?”

A noun that names one or more animals, places, or

things answers the question, “What?”

§5.1
COUNTABLE Nouns that can be counted have two forms: singular and
NOUNS plural.

§5.1-1
Singular A singular noun names one person, animal, place, thing, or
Nouns abstraction.
Person Place Thing Abstraction
girl town house idea
boy airport piano science
doctor area radio problem

Collective Nouns
A collective noun is a singular noun that names a group of
people with a common interest.
EXAMPLES
team a group of players working together
class a group of students studying together
family a group of people related by blood
office a group of people who work for the same boss

29
30 Grammar §5.

To use a singular noun,

(a) always use a noun determiner (a/an, the, one,
this, that, any, each, every, another, either,
neither, my, your, his, her, our, their, or a
possessive noun)—see §5.1 and §7.1.

(b) use a singular verb (he/she/it form)—see §8.

EXAMPLES
Noun Determiner Singular Noun Singular Verb
a book is
the book has
my book weighs
my team wins
a family has
the class is

§5.1-2
Plural Nouns A plural noun names two or more people, animals, places,
things, or abstractions.
To make plurals,

1. add -s to most nouns:

People Places Things Abstractions
girls towns houses ideas
boys airports pianos sciences
doctors areas radios problems

2. add -es to the following nouns that end in -o:

People Things Abstractions
heroes tomatoes tornadoes
potatoes echoes
mosquitoes

3. add -es to nouns ending in ch, sh, ss, and x;

People Places Things Abstractions
witches churches watches crashes
brushes messes
dresses
boxes
§5- Nouns 31

4. for nouns ending in y after a consonant, drop the y and

add ies:
People Places Things Abstractions
lady/ladies city/cities body/bodies philosophy/philosophies
baby/babies university/ factory/factories study/studies
universities

5. for nouns ending in f or fe, drop the f(e) and add ves:
People Things Abstractions
wife/wives knife/knives life/lives
leaf/leaves
shelf/shelves

6. change the form of several common nouns:

People Things
one man three men one foot three feet
one woman three women one tooth three teeth
one child three children one mouse three mice
one person three people

7. use the singular form for the plural of several nouns:

Animals Abstractions
one deer two deer one series two series
one sheep two sheep one species two species
one fish two fish

8. use Latin plurals for certain Latin nouns:

Things Abstractions
one memorandum two memoranda one criterion two criteria
one two
phenomenon phenomena
one thesis two theses one crisis two crises
one stimulus two stimuli

To use plural nouns,

(a) a noun determiner is optional. You can use the,
zero, all numbers except one, these, those,
any, no, either, neither, other, some, both,
few, enough, plenty, of, a lot of, lots of,
many, all, my, your, his, her, its, our, their, or
a possessive noun—see §5.1 and §7.1.

(b) When there is no noun determiner, the

meaning “all” is implied.
32 Grammar §5.

EXAMPLES
Her flowers are beautiful. (Only her flowers)
Flowers are beautiful. (All flowers)
These exercises are fun. (Only these exercises)
Exercises are fun. (All exercises)

(c) use a plural verb {we/you/they form)—see §8.

EXAMPLES
Noun
Determiner Plural Noun Plural Verb
The girls are here.
My friends have jobs.
These exercises help.
Her flowers are beautiful.
Exercises help.
Flowers are beautiful.

§5.2
NON-COUNT
NOUNS
§5.2-1
Common Anon-count noun names
Examples 1. a group or collection of diverse things:
furniture tables, chairs, beds, etc.
jewelry necklaces, bracelets, rings,
watches, etc.
mail letters, postcards, packages, etc.
equipment necessities for a project
machinery different machines
hardware tools and supplies
makeup lipstick, powder, mascara, etc.
money bills and change
change nickels, dimes, quarters, and
pennies

2. an item made up of parts that are too small to count:

hair many tiny strands
sugar many tiny grains
rice many tiny grains
salt many tiny grains
sand many tiny grains
coffee many tiny granules
tea many tiny leaves
§5- Nouns 33

corn many small kernels

dirt many small particles
dust many small particles
flour many small particles
grass many small blades

3. an activity or abstraction made up of variable parts:

work activities of physical or mental
concentration
housework cleaning, dusting, doing laundry, etc.
homework assignments of reading, writing,
listening, researching, etc.
advice suggestions to help someone
information facts of interest
news important events
music series of notes, sounds, songs

4. liquids:
water
milk
soup
juice
coffee
tea

5. food and other useful commodities:

bread
meat
chicken
fish
cheese
cotton
wool
copper
glass
rubber
soap

6. environmental phenomena:
air
land
oxygen
smoke
steam
wind
heat
34 Grammar §5.

7. human qualities:
honesty
beauty
intelligence
patience
kindness
generosity
courage
independence
pride
selfishness

8. conditions:
health
sickness
wealth
poverty
education
anger
luck

9. subjects of study:
psychology
biology
medicine
law
science
religion
English

§5.2-2
Using Non- To use non-count nouns,
(a) a noun determiner is optional. You can use the,
Count Nouns this, that, any, no, either, neither, some, little,
enough, a lot of, lots of, plenty of, much, all, my,
your, his, her, its, our, their, or a possessive
noun—see §5.1 and §7.1.

(b) When there is no noun determiner, the meaning

“all” is implied.
EXAMPLES
This coffee is delicious. (Only this coffee)
Coffee is delicious. (All coffee)
§5. Nouns 35

(c) use a singular verb (he/she/it form)—see §8.

EXAMPLES
Noun Non-Count Singular
Determiner Noun Verb
Our homework is difficult.
A lot of medicine makes me sick.
Homework is necessary.
Medicine costs a lot.

§5.2-3
Nouns That A few nouns can be count in certain situations, and
Can Be Count non-count in others.

or Non-Count count: one coffee one cup of coffee

non-count: coffee the beans or granules used
for making a cup of coffee
count: one chicken an animal
non-count: chicken the meat of a chicken
count: one glass a container that holds liquids
glasses lenses for improving sight
non-count: glass the material a glass is
made of
count: one iron an appliance used for
pressing clothes
non-count: iron a metal
count: one paper a newspaper; a report
non-count: paper the material a report is
written on
count: one time one occasion
non-count: time the present, past, and future

§5.3
PROPER Proper nouns are specific names of individual people,
groups of people, places, and things. They are written with
NOUNS
capital letters. The article the is used with certain proper
nouns, but not with others. See §7.14.
EXAMPLES
Mary Smith the name of a person
Mr. Jones the name of a person
New York the name of a state
36 Grammar §5

Springfield the name of a city

Oak Street the name of a street
Canadian the name of a nationality
November the name of a month
Saturday the name of a day
Thanksgiving the name of a holiday
English the name of a language
the United States the name of a country
the Book Club the name of an organization
the Arlington Library the name of an institution
the Capitol the name of a building

§5.4
APPOSITIVES An appositive is a noun that follows a noun and renames it.
Put a comma before the appositive, and a comma or a
period after the appositive.
EXAMPLES
Mary, my sister, is a doctor.
Mary liked her teacher, Mrs. Smith.
Our neighbors, the Cordovas, are delightful.
Rice, her favorite food, is good for her.

§5.5
POSSESSIVE
NOUNS

§5.5-1
“Whose?” A possessive noun tells who “has” something. It answers
the question, “Whose?”
To make a noun possessive,
(a) add’s to a singular noun:
the book that Mary owns Whose book? Mary’s
the friend that Mary has Whose friend? Mary’s
the car that my friend has Whose car? my friend’s
the dog that Charles owns Whose dog? Charles’s
the dog that Charles Adams Whose dog? Charles
owns Adams’s
the stereo that Joe Perez Whose stereo? Joe Perez’s
has
the bone that the dog has Whose bone? the dog’s
the basketball that the boy Whose the boy’s
has basketball?
§5. Nouns 37

(b) add’s to a plural noun that does not end in s:

the money that the people Whose money? the people’s
have
the toys that the children Whose toys? the
have children’s
the shirts that the men own Whose shirts? the men’s
the shoes that belong to Whose shoes? the women’s
the women

(c) add ' to a plural noun that ends in s:

the party that the ladies Whose party? the ladies’
have
the basketball that belongs Whose the boys’
to the boys basketball?
the room where the teachers Whose room? the
relax teachers’
the house that belongs to Whose house? the
the Adamses Adamses’
the car that belongs to the Whose car? the Perezes’
Perezes

(d) use a + (noun) + of + the possessive noun to

indicate that the item owned is only one of several:
a book that Mary has Whose book? a book of
Mary’s
a friend that my sister has Whose friend? a friend of
my sister’s

§5.5-2
Using Use the possessive form to show ownership by people. Do
Possessive not use of the with people.

Nouns EXAMPLES
John’s book
Mr. Harris’s car
The Lewis’s house

Use either the possessive form or the prepositional

phrase of the with other living or natural things.
EXAMPLES
the dog’s leg the leg of the dog
the tiger’s tail the tail of the tiger
the plant’s leaves or the leaves of the plant
the sun’s rays the rays of the sun
the river’s mouth the mouth of the river
38 Grammar §5-

Use either the possessive form or the prepositional

phrase of the with collective nouns.
EXAMPLES
the company’s president the president of the company
the team’s captain the captain of the team
the committee’s agenda the agenda of the committee
a family’s celebration the celebration of a family

Use the possessive form—or a prepositional phrase—

with certain time expressions.
EXAMPLES
today’s date the date of today
the year’s end the end of the year
the day’s work the work of the day
tomorrow’s agenda the agenda for tomorrow
next week’s lesson the lesson for next week

Do not use the possessive form for other nonliving

things. Show possession with of the.
EXAMPLES
the door of the car
the legs of the table
the color of her dress
the rooms of the house
the name of that street

§5.6
COMPARING
NOUNS

§5.6-1
Comparing To make a positive comparison of plural or non-count
Nouns by nouns, use:
more + noun + than + noun
Number or or
Amount more + noun + than + subject + (verb)
The verb is optional.

I have more pencils than pens.

I have more pencils than you do.
§5. Nouns 39

I have more sugar than flour.

I have more sugar than she does.

To make a negative comparison of plural nouns, use:

fewer+ noun + than

I have fewer pens than pencils.

I have fewer pens than she does.

To make a negative comparison of non-count nouns,use:

less + noun + than

I have less flour than sugar.

I have less flour than she does.

To show equality with plural nouns, use:

as many + noun + as

I have as many notebooks as books.

I have as many notebooks as he does.

You can also use:

the same number of+ noun + as

I have the same number of notebooks as

books.
I have the same number of notebooks as
he does.

To show equality with non-count nouns, use:

as much + noun + as

I have as much vinegar as oil.

I have as much vinegar as you do.

You can also use:

the same amount of + noun + as

I have the same amount of vinegar as oil.

I have the same amount of vinegar as
you do.
40 Grammar §5.

§5.6-2
Expressing For singular, plural and non-count nouns, use:
Equality of the same + noun + as

Size, Weight, EXAMPLES

My dress is the same size as your dress.
Shape, and Our dresses are the same size.
Color
My shoes are the same size as your shoes.
Our shoes are the same size.
My furniture is the same size as your furniture.
Our furniture is the same size.
Your baby is the same weight as her baby.
Your babies are the same weight.
He is the same height as his father.
They are the same height.
Her skirt is the same length as the model’s.
Their skirts are the same length.
This pond is the same depth as that one.
They are the same depth.
This tree is the same shape as that tree.
The trees are the same shape.
Their uniforms are the same color as ours.
They are the same color.

§5.6-3
Expressing To show that two nouns are equal in every way, use:
Absolute exactly like + noun or exactly alike
the same as + noun the same
Equality
EXAMPLES
Your dress is exactly like my dress.
Our dresses are exactly alike.
Your dress is the same as my dress.
Our dresses are the same.
Her earrings are exactly like yours.
Your earrings are exactly alike.
Her earrings are the same as yours.
Your earrings are the same.
§5. Nouns 41

His furniture is exactly like hers.

Their furniture is exactly alike.
His furniture is the same as hers.
Their furniture is the same.

§5.6-4
The Same + the same + noun = the actual noun previously thought
Noun about or spoken about
EXAMPLES
I saw some beautiful shoes in the window.
You did? I saw the same shoes.
There is a young lady waiting for you.
She is the same lady who was here before.
I lost my suitcase.
Now I have to wear the same clothes for a week.
 §6.
Pronouns
A pronoun is a substitute for a noun. Use the pronoun when
the noun has already been named, to avoid repeating it.
§6.1
SUBJECT A subject pronoun replaces a noun that is the subject of a
PRONOUNS sentence—the person, place, or thing we are talking about.
It answers the question, “Who?” for a person, and
“What?” for an animal, thing, or abstraction—see §4.1.

I = the speaker I am Mary.

you = the person spoken to You are Susana.
he = another person, who is male He is David.
she = another person, who is female She is Patricia.
we = I and you, he, she, and/or they We are Mary and
Susana.
you = you and he, she, and/or they You are Susana
and David.
they = other people They are David
and Patricia.
it = an animal, thing, or abstraction It is Rover.
It is a book.
It is information.
they = one or more animals, things, or They are dogs.
abstractions. They are books.
They are
announcements.
EXAMPLES
Question Response
Who is the teacher? Sara is the teacher.
When does she begin the class? She begins at eight.
When does she go home? She goes home at four-thirty.

Who are the students? Steve and Tom are the students.
Is Steve from St. Louis? He and Tom are from St. Louis.
They are from St. Louis.

Who is taking them home? Sara and I are taking them home.
She and I are taking them home.
What time are you taking them? We are taking them at four-thirty.

42
§6. Pronouns 43

Sometimes the pronouns you and they do not refer to a

specific person or people, but to people in general, or all
people.
EXAMPLES
Question Meaning Answer
Do you buy medicine at Do people buy Yes. You (can) buy
the supermarket? medicine at the medicine at the
supermarket? supermarket.
Where do you get your Where do people You get your keys at
keys? get their keys? the office.
How do you get to How does one get to You drive straight
Route 7? Route 7? ahead, then turn left.
Do they sell medicine at Is medicine sold at Yes. They sell
the supermarket? the supermarket? medicine at the
supermarket.
Do they give you your Are keys given out Yes. They give you
keys at the office? at the office? your keys at the
office.

§6.2
OBJECT An object pronoun replaces a noun that is a direct object,
an indirect object, or an object of a preposition. It answers
PRONOUNS
the question, “Who(m)?”for people, and “What?” for
things—see §4.1.

Subject Pronoun Object Pronoun

i me
you you
he him
she her
it it
we us
they them

§6.2-1
John called Mary. (I am Mary.) John called me.
Direct Object John called Susana. (You are Susana.) John called you.
Pronouns John called Patricia. (She is Patricia.) John called her.
John called David. (He is David.) John called him.
John called Mary and Susan. John called us.
John called me
and you.
John called Susana and Patricia. John called you.
John called you
and her.
44 Grammar §6.

John called Patricia and David. John called them.

John called her
and him.
John got the check. John got it.
John got the checks. John got them.
EXAMPLES
Question Answer
Who(m) did you see? 1 saw Betty.
When did you see her? 1 saw her yesterday.
Did you see Sam? Yes, 1 saw him, too.
1 saw her and him yesterday.
1 saw Betty and him.
1 saw her and Sam.
1 saw them yesterday.
Did they see you and your No, they didn’t see us.
friend? They didn’t see me and him.
They didn’t see him and me.

§6.2-2
Object-of- to Mary = to me
Preposition for Susana = for you
from Patricia = from her
Pronouns with David = with him
about Mary and Susana = about us
without Susana and Patricia = without you
of Patricia and David = of them
EXAMPLES
Question Answer
Are you going with Cathy Yes. 1 am going with her and him.
and AM? 1 am going with them.
Did Bob leave without you Yes. He left without me and him.
and Georges? He left without us.
Who(m) is that present for? It’s for my mother and Ines.
It’s for her and Ines.
It’s for them.

§6.2-3
Indirect Object Kim gave the book to Mary. Kim gave me the book,
Pronouns Kim gave the book to Susana. Kim gave you the book,
Kim gave the book to Patricia. Kim gave her the book,
Kim gave the book to David. Kim gave him the book.
§6- Pronouns 45

Kim gave the book to David Kim gave us the book.

and Mary. Kim gave David and me
the book.
Kim gave the book to Susana Kim gave you the book.
and Patricia. Kim gave you and her the
book.
Kim gave the book to Patricia Kim gave them the book.
and David. Kim gave her and him the
book.
EXAMPLES
Question Answer
Who(m) did you send the 1 sent my friend the letter.
letter to? 1 sent him the letter.
Did you send it to him and No. 1 didn’t send her the letter.
his sister? 1 didn’t send them the letter.
1 sent him the letter.
Who wrote you the answer? She wrote me and my
brother the answer.
She wrote me and him the answer.
She wrote us the answer.

§6.2-4
Using Two When there is an indirect object pronoun before the direct
Object object, the direct object must be in noun—not pronoun—
form.
Pronouns
EXAMPLES Do Not Use:
Together He gave me the book. He gave me it.
We told them the story. We told them it.
I’ll show you my new I’ll show you them.
dresses.

To use the direct object pronoun with an indirect object

pronoun, use a preposition.
EXAMPLES
He gave me the book. He gave it to me.
We told them the story. We told it to them.
I’ll show you my new dresses. I’ll show them to you.

§6.3
RECIPROCAL The reciprocal pronoun each other refers to a relationship
PRONOUNS between two people or groups.
46 Grammar §6.

EXAMPLES
Jane and I are friends.
I talk to Jane; Jane talks to me. We talk to each other.

The doctors and nurses work together.

The doctors help the nurses, and
the nurses help the doctors. They help each other.

One another is used to refer to a relationship among three

or more people.
EXAMPLES
The doctors and nurses help one another.
Jane, Carolyn, and Mia talked to one another about the
problem.

§6.4
INTENSIVE myself ourselves
AND yourself yourselves
himself themselves
REFLEXIVE herself
PRONOUNS itself

§6.4-1
Intensive An intensive pronoun restates a subject noun or pronoun,
Pronouns to emphasize it.
EXAMPLES
I vote “no” myself.
You know that yourself.
Julie went to the store herself.
Mark did it himself.
Emily and I made this cake ourselves.
Did you and Jack build the house yourselves?
The robbers themselves called the police.

§6.4-2
Reflexive A reflexive pronoun is an object pronoun that refers back
Pronouns to the subject. The subject and the object are the same
person or thing.
EXAMPLES
I cut myself.
Did you cure yourself?
§6- Pronouns 47

He needs to help himself.

She sent a letter to herself.
This door locks itself.
We gave ourselves a party.
Did you make yourselves comfortable?
They are hurting themselves.

The preposition by + a reflexive pronoun means “alone.”

Statement Meaning
1 did it by myself. Nobody helped me.
She is by herself. She is alone.
They played by themselves. Nobody else played with them.

§6.5
POSSESSIVE A possessive pronoun replaces a possessive noun. It
PRONOUNS answers the question, “Whose?”—see §5.

Whose book is it?

The book is Mary’s. The book is mine.
The book is Susana’s. The book is yours.
The book is David’s. The book is his.
The book is Patricia’s. The book is hers.
The book is Mary’s and Susana’s. The book is ours.
The book is Susana’s and Patricia’s. The book is yours.
The book is Patricia’s and David’s. The book is theirs.

To show possession, you can also use

It belongs to + noun or object pronoun

Whose book is it?

It belongs to me. It’s mine.
It belongs to you. It’s yours.
It belongs to her. It’s hers.
It belongs to him. It’s his.
It belongs to her and me. It’s ours.
It belongs to me and him. It’s ours.
It belongs to us. It’s ours.
It belongs to her and him. It’s theirs.
It belongs to them. It’s theirs.
48 Grammar §6.

§6.6
RELATIVE A relative pronoun
PRONOUNS
who, whom, whose, which, that

replaces a noun in an adjective clause. It answers the

questions

“Who...?” “Whom...?” “Whose...?” “Which...?”

“What...?” and “What kind of...?”

Who is he? He is a man. He came to our house.

He is the man who came to our
house.

From whom did you The lady is Mrs. Smith. I received

receive the gift? the gift from her.
The lady from whom I received
the gift is Mrs. Smith.

Whose dog is this? The girl is my niece. This is her dog.

The girl whose dog this is is my
niece.

What kind of book I want a book. The book has

do you want? pictures.
I want a book that has pictures.
What book do you The book that I want is the one
want? with pictures.

Note: The pronoun in the last example can be deleted:

The book () I want is the one with pictures.

§6.7
DEMONSTRATIVE
PRONOUNS

§6.7-1
IndiCdf ing a A demonstrative pronoun indicates a specific noun. It
Specific Noun answers the questions

“Which?” “Which one?” and “Which ones?”

§6. Pronouns 49

This replaces a singular or This is my watch.

non-count noun that is nearby. This is my jewelry.
It is here.

These replaces a plural noun that These are my

is nearby. They are here. watches.

That replaces a singular or That is your watch.

non-count noun that is farther That is your jewelry.
away. It is there.

Those replaces a plural noun that Those are your

is farther away. They are there. watches.

§6.7-2
Using One One refers to a specific item already named.
Question Answer
Which dress do you want? 1 want the red one.
1 want this one.
1 don’t want that one.
Which (one) is yours? This is mine.
This one is mine.
It can be plural.
Which dresses do you want? 1 want the cotton ones.
1 want these.
1 don’t want the wool ones.
1 don’t want those.
Which (ones) are yours? These are mine.

Note: Do not use ones after these and those.

§6.8
INDEFINITE An indefinite pronoun refers to a noun that is not specific.
PRONOUNS

§6.8-1
Singular (a) Referring only to people:
anybody (one of all people) Anybody can do it.
Indefinite
anyone (one of all people) Is anyone there?
Pronouns not anybody (not one person) There isn’t anybody in
the house.
not anyone (not one person) There isn’t anyone in
the store.
nobody (not one person) Nobody can do it.
50 Grammar §6.

no one (not one person) No one is at home.

somebody (one person) Somebody can help us.
someone (one person) Someone is in the
office.

(b) Referring only to places:

anywhere (one of all places) 1 can go anywhere.
not anywhere (not one place) 1 cannot go anywhere.
The ring is not any-
where in this house.
nowhere (not one place) The ring is nowhere in
this house.
somewhere (one place) 1 will find it somewhere.

(c) Referring only to things:

anything (one of all things) Anything is better than
nothing.
not anything (no thing) There isn’t anything
to eat.
nothing (no thing) There is nothing to eat.
something (one thing) There is something in
this box.

(d) Referring to people or things:

one (one) Is there a doctor in the
house?
Yes, 1 am one.
Does anybody have a
book?
Yes, 1 have one.
another (one) (one more) She has two children.
She wants another.
(a different one) She has a book. She
wants another one.
any (one, no Which lawyer do you
preference) prefer?
Any will be O.K.
What book do you want?
Any is fine.
each (all, one by one) What do the children
have?
Each has a balloon.
either (one or the other) Do you want an apple
or a banana?
Either is fine.
neither (not one nor the Which coat is yours?
other) Neither is mine.
§6. Pronouns 51

§6.8-2
Plural Plural indefinite pronouns may refer to people or things,
Indefinite none (zero) How many books are
there?
Pronouns There are none.
not any (zero) How many teachers
are there?
There aren’t any.
any number (two to infinity) How many chairs are
over one there?
There are twelve.
some (more than one) How many girls are
there?
There are some.
both (the two) Which pen is yours?
Both are mine.
either (these or those) Which do you want,
CDs or tapes?
Either are fine.
neither (not these or those) Which dishes are
yours
—these or those?
Neither are mine.
others (different ones) Are these all you
have?
No. 1 have others.
few, very few (not enough) How many participants
are there?
There are few.
a few (three or four) How many people are
there?
There are a few.
several (four or five) How many children are
there?
There are several.
enough (the needed How many cars are
number) there?
There are enough.
a lot (a large number) How many sandwiches
are there?
There are a lot.
not many (not a large How many plates are
number) there?
There are not many.
52 Grammar §6.

too many (more than is How many mistakes

good) are there?
There are too many.
all (100 percent) Which photographs are
good?
All are good.

§6.8-3
Non-Count none (no amount) How much traffic is
Indefinite there?
There is none.
Pronouns either (one or the other) Do you want furniture
or jewelry?
Either is good.
neither (not one or the Do you want tea or
other) coffee?
Neither is good for me.
some (more than none) How much pollution is
there?
There is some.
little, (not enough) How much money is
very little there?
There is little.
a little (a small quantity) How much information
is there?
There is a little.
enough (the needed How much work is
amount) there?
There is enough.
a lot (a large amount) How much music is
there?
There is a lot.
too much (more than is How much advice is
good) there?
There is too much.
§6. Pronouns 53

§6.8-4
Another / Compare another/the other/others:
The Other / Singular Plural
Others another = one more or a others = more or different
different one ones (but not all of them)

<h(h<h <h (h <h

$ $$$$ v]) vj)

one another some others

the other = the only the others = all of the

remaining one remaining ones

<£<h(h(h(£
$ $
one the other some the others
 §7.
Adjectives
Adjectives give information about nouns.
There are two kinds of adjectives: noun determiners and
descriptive adjectives.
Noun determiners identify and limit nouns. They have
specific relationships with singular nouns, plural nouns, and
non-count nouns.
Descriptive adjectives have the same form for singular,
plural, and non-count nouns. Their use is optional.
Use the following patterns:

Noun Determiner (required) + Descriptive Adjective (optional) + Singular Noun

a beautiful watch
Noun Determiner (optional) + Descriptive Adjective (optional) + Plural Noun
these beautiful watches
Noun Determiner (optional) + Descriptive Adjective (optional) + Non-Count Noun
this beautiful jewelry

EXAMPLES
Correct Forms Do Not Use:
Singular Nouns
I have a watch. I have watch.
I have a beautiful watch.
I have the watch.
I have this watch.

Plural Nouns
I have watches. I have a watches.
I have beautiful watches. I have this watches.
I have the watches.
I have these watches.

Non-count Nouns
I have jewelry. I have a jewelry.
I have beautiful jewelry. I have these jewelry.
I have the jewelry. I have jewelries.
I have this jewelry.

54
§7. Adjectives 55

§7.1
NOUN
DETERMINERS
§7.1-1
Articles— An article helps identify a noun.
a, an, the (a) A or an is used only before a singular noun and identi-
fies it as one of many, not a special one. It answers the
question, “What is it?” or “Who is it?”

Use a before a singular noun that begins with a con-

sonant sound.

a man a street a cassette a problem

a nurse a building a box a thought
a university*

University begins with a vowel letter, but is pro-

nounced with the consonant sound, yu.

Use an before a singular noun that begins with a

vowel sound.

an artist an area an apple an idea

an optimist an estate an orange an operation
an R.S.V.P.*

*R is a consonant, but is pronounced with the vowel

sound, ar.

When there is a descriptive adjective, choose a or an

according to the first sound of the adjective.

a nice lady a big city a red belt a pretty dress

an intelligent an old city an orange an ugly dress
lady belt

(b) The indicates a specific singular, plural, or non-count

noun.
the table the tables the furniture
56 Grammar §7.

The answers the question, “What (noun)?” or

“Which one(s)?”
Use the

1. when there is only one to choose from:

Question Answer Meaning
Which door? the door the only door
Which keys? the keys the only keys
What zoo? the zoo the (only) zoo in the city

2. when the listener knows which item:

Question Answer Meaning
Which book? the book the book you gave me
What letters? the letters the letters John wrote to us
What dress? the dress the dress we saw in the
shop
Which car? the car our car
What jewelry? the jewelry the jewelry 1 gave you

(c) Compare a/an with the:

What is it? It’s an apple.
Which apple is it? It’s the apple you gave me.
What is it? It’s a school.
What school is it? It’s the school our children go to.
What is it? It’s a problem.
What problem is it? It’s the problem I told you about.
Who is she? She’s a girl.
Which girl is she? She’s the girl I like.

(d) The with proper nouns:

To be sure about these, learn each proper noun as you
need it.
Do not use fhewith certain singular proper nouns. For
example:
Mary
Mary Jones
Mrs. Jones
President Smith
Texas
South America
Korea
Chicago
Central Park
Hudson Bay
Memorial Bridge
Madison High School
§7. Adjectives 57

Virginia Tech
Oak Street
January
Monday
Kim’s Dry Cleaners

Use the before other singular proper nouns. For

example,
the Secretary of Labor
the President of the United States
the Equator
the Catskills
the White House
the Smithsonian
the University of Wisconsin
the New Jersey Turnpike
the Brooklyn Bridge
the Chesapeake Bay
the White Company
the United Kingdom
the Western Hemisphere

Use the before plural proper nouns. For example,

the United States
the Netherlands
the Philippines
the Andes
the Rocky Mountains
the Great Lakes
the United Nations
the Smiths, the Joneses

(e) Special cases of no article and the:

at home = in a person’s own home
at the home of = in someone else’s home
at school = attending classes
at the school = visiting a school
at church = worshipping
at the church = visiting the church
in jail = detained by law
at the jail = visiting the jail
at work = working
58 Grammar §7.

home = to a person’s own home

to the home of = to someone else’s home
to school = to the school for study
to the school = to a school for a visit
to church = to the church for worship
to the church = to a church for a visit
to jail = to be locked up
to the jail = to the jail for a visit
to work = to a place for work
EXAMPLES
She won’t be at home today. The meeting is at the home
of her sister.
My son came home from school early yesterday because
he was sick. He didn’t go to school today. I went to the
school this morning to talk to the teacher.

North, south, east, and west are directions. They are used
with verbs that indicate movement in that direction. The
before each word indicates a section of a larger place.
EXAMPLES
Go north, and you will find that building. It is in the north of
the city.
The birds fly south every winter. The weather is much
warmer in the south.
His parents were not happy in the west, so they moved
back east.

Breakfast, lunch, and dinner are meals in general.

The breakfast, the lunch, and the dinner mean specific
meals.
EXAMPLES
I usually don’t eat breakfast. The breakfast your mother
made was delicious.
We are having lunch at the office today. The lunch Max
brought looks good.
Let’s eat dinner at that restaurant. The dinner we had
there last week was great.

last night = the night before today

the last night = the final night
§7. Adjectives 59

last week = the week before this one

the last week = the final week

last year = the year before this one

the last year = the final year
EXAMPLES
Jack called me last night. He said that Friday was the last
night of his conference.
We had our exam last week. It was the last week of
classes.
I bought a car last year; 1997 will be the last year I have
to make payments on it.

in office = serving as an elected official

in the office = located in a room
EXAMPLES
Her husband has been in office for five years. He spends a
lot of time in the office writing letters to his supporters.

§7.1-2
Numbers (a) Cardinal numbers answer the question “How many?”
0 (zero, no) requires a plural noun.
There are zero apples in the basket.
There are no apples in the basket.
1 (one) describes a singular noun.
There is one table in the room.
All other numbers describe plural nouns.
There are two chairs.
There are forty-six people.
There are fifty states in the United States.
(See §20 for a complete number chart.)

(b) An ordinal number tells the relative position of a singu-

lar or plural noun. Always use the article the before an
ordinal number.

The ordinal numbers for 1,2, 3, and for combinations

with 1,2, and 3, are:
the first the 1st the twenty-first the 21st
the second the 2nd the thirty-second the 32nd
the third the 3rd the sixty-third the 63rd
60 Grammar

The ordinal numbers for 5, 8, 9, 12, and for combina-

tions with 5, 8, and 9 are:
the fifth the 5th the forty-fifth the 45th
the eighth the 8th the eighty-eighth the 88th
the ninth the 9th the twenty-ninth the 29th
the twelfth the 12th

All other ordinal numbers are the cardinal number + th

the fourth the 4th the twenty-fourth the 24th
the sixth the 6th the seventy-sixth the 76th
the seventh the 7th the thirty-seventh the 37th
the fifteenth the 15th
EXAMPLES
January is the first month of the year.
The third day of the week is Tuesday.
The first three days of the month are the first, the second,
and the third.
Her birthday is on the twenty-seventh of December, the
twelfth month of the year.—see §21.

§7.1-3
Possessive A possessive adjective indicates the owner of the following
Adjectives noun. It answers the question “Whose?”

Whose book is it?

It’s Mary’s book. (1 am Mary) It’s my book.
It’s Susana’s book. (You are Susans) It’s your book.
It’s David’s book. (He is David) It’s his book.
It’s Patricia’s book. (She is Patricia) It’s her book.
It’s Mary and Susana’s
book. It’s our book.
It’s Susana and Patricia’s
book. It’s your book.
It’s Patricia and David’s book. It’s their book.

§7.1-4
Demonstrative A demonstrative adjective points out a specific noun. It
Adjectives answers the question “Which?”

This indicates a singular or non-count noun that is nearby:

This watch is expensive.
This jewelry is expensive.
§7- Adjectives 61

That indicates a singular or non-count noun that is farther

away:
That watch is expensive.
That jewelry is expensive.

These indicates a plural noun that is nearby:

These watches are expensive.

Those indicates a plural noun that is farther away:

Those watches are expensive.

§7.1-5
More Noun Use adjectives marked s with singular nouns, p/with plural
Q0f0rinj|-i0|’5 nouns, nc with non-count nouns—see §5.1 and 5.2.

any s one, but not a special one 1 will take any book.
Pi more than one, but not 1 will take any books.
special ones
nc an unspecific amount 1 will take any information.

not any pl zero 1 do not want any pre-

sents.
nc no amount 1 do not want any money.

no Pl zero 1 have no books.

nc no amount 1 have no information.

each s 100 percent, one by one She collects each test.

every s 100 percent, one by one She collects every test.

another s one more 1 want another cookie.

s a different one 1 want another doctor.

other pl different, more She has other friends.

nc different, more She has other jewelry.

the other s not this one, that one He wants the other car.
nc not this, that She wants the other
jewelry.

either s this one or that one He wants either car.

Pl these or those He wants either books.
nc this or that He wants either furniture.
62 Grammar §7.

neither s not this one or that one He wants neither car.

Pi not these or those He wants neither these
nor those.
nc not this or that He wants neither furniture.

some Pi more than one She has some pennies.

nc more than nothing He has some money.

both Pi the two We like both dresses.

very few Pi almost no He eats very few

vegetables.
few Pi not many They have few doctors.
a few Pi three or four They have a few helpers.
quite a few Pi enough, or more There are quite a few
people.

very little nc almost no She drinks very little milk.

little nc a small amount He eats little meat.
a little nc a small amount, but enough We have a little furniture.
quite a bit of nc enough, or more There is quite a bit
of work.

enough Pi the necessary number 1 have enough clothes.

nc the necessary amount He doesn’t have enough
time.

plenty of Pi enough, or more They have plenty of toys.

nc enough, or more She has plenty of time.

a lot of pl a large number There are a lot of cars.

nc a large amount There is a lot of traffic.

lots of Pl a large number There are lots of cars.

nc a large amount There is lots of traffic.

quite a lot of pl a large number There are quite a lot of

leaves.
nc a large amount There is quite a lot of
crime.

How many? Pl What number of? How many lamps are

there?
not many pl a small number of There are not many
dishes.
many Pl a large number of We have many friends.
§7- Adjectives 63

a good many Pi a large number of We have a good many

parties.
a great many Pi a very large number of There are a great many
ideas.
too many Pi more than desirable There are too many calls.

How much? nc What amount of? How much time is there?

not much nc a small amount of There is not much china.
too much nc more than desirable She wears too much
makeup.

a good deal of nc a large amount of There is a good deal of

food.
a great deal of nc a very large amount of There is a great deal of
heat.

all Pi 100 percent, in general All things change.

no determiner Pi 100 percent, in general Things change.
all nc 100 percent, in general All time is valuable.
no determiner nc 100 percent, in general Time is valuable.
all the Pi 100 percent of specific things All the leaves (in our yard)
have fallen.
nc 100 percent of a specific All the money (we have) is
amount in the bank.

§7.2
DESCRIPTIVE A descriptive adjective tells the size, shape, age, color,
ADJECTIVES origin, material, or the speaker’s opinion of a noun. It is the
same for singular, plural, and non-count nouns.
Its place is before the noun:
a big table big tables big furniture
this big table these big tables this big furniture
my big table my big tables my big furniture

after a form of be or other linking verb—see §4.1-2:

The table is big. The tables are The furniture
big. seems big.
The apple is The apples are The fruit smells
good. good. good.
The bracelet is The bracelets The jewelry
pretty. are pretty. looks pretty.
64 Grammar §7.

§7.2-1
Proper A proper adjective identifies a noun as a part of an official
place or group. It is written with a capital letter.
Descriptive
Adjectives EXAMPLES
an American flag
the Mexican students
my Italian shoes
her European friends
the Eastern seaboard
a Jewish holiday
the Hispanic community

§7.2-2
Nouns Used A noun can describe another noun, and is placed before it,
as Adjectives like an adjective. It is never plural, even when its reference
is plural.
EXAMPLES
a glass jar a jar made of glass
a plastic bag a bag made of plastic
paper dolls dolls made of paper
mosquito bites the bites of mosquitoes
a school bus a bus for a school
a jewelry box a box for jewelry
a bottle opener a tool for opening bottles
a shoe store a store that sells shoes
a dress shop a shop that sells dresses
an apple pie a pie made of apples
an earring box a box for earrings

Some noun + noun combinations are written as one word.

EXAMPLES
dishwasher
motorcycle
trashcan
drugstore

Certain adjectives are formed by adding edto a noun. (See

§8, page 74 for spelling with ed suffixes). These adjectives
are often preceded by a color or a number, and are written
with hyphens.
EXAMPLES
head a red-headed boy
leg a three-legged stool
point a six-pointed star
§7. Adjectives 65

§7.2-3
Verbs Used Present participle forms of verbs, which end in ing, can
as Adjectives describe nouns.
sleeping babies
a caring mother
daring acrobats
a terrifying experience
an interesting story

Past participle forms of verbs can describe nouns,

ironed clothes
dried flowers
saved money
deserted streets
a spoken language
a broken plate
lost and found clothing

Participles that describe people can be confusing.

Remember:
the /ngform is the cause; the ed form is the effect.
When the teacher is boring, the students are bored,
If the movie is exciting, the audience is excited,
If the actor is fascinating, the people are
fascinated.
When the news is surprising, the people are surprised,
If the lesson is confusing, the students are
confused,
If the message is threatening, the reader feels
threatened,
If the voice is frightening, the listener feels
frightened.
If the book is interesting, the reader is interested.

§7.2-4
Prepositions Certain prepositions (§17) can be used as adjectives.
Used as EXAMPLES
Adjectives the in crowd
a through street
the down staircase
66 Grammar

§7.2-5
Compound A compound adjective is a combination of two or more
Adjectives words joined by hyphens and used to describe a noun.
EXAMPLES
a ten-pound baby
the six-foot man
my two-hundred-dollar shoes
an all-night party
a well-built house
an up-to-date analysis
a round-the-clock schedule

§7.2-6
Comparing Adjectives change to show differences in nouns.
Descriptive To strengthen an adjective: To weaken an adjective:
1. add er to a one-syllable put not as before
Adjectives adjective the adjective
cheap cheaper not as cheap
clean cleaner not as clean
cold colder not as cold
dark darker not as dark
fair fairer not as fair
fast faster not as fast
light lighter not as light
long longer not as long
near nearer not as near
neat neater not as neat
plain plainer not as plain
short shorter not as short
slow slower not as slow
small smaller not as small
soon sooner not as soon
sweet sweeter not as sweet

add rto one-syllable adjectives put not as before

that end in e the adjective
nice nicer not as nice
close closer not as close
fine finer not as fine
cute cuter not as cute
late later not as late
loose looser not as loose
§7. Adjectives 67

3. double the last consonant, then put not as before

add erto one-syllable adjectives the adjective
that end in a consonant + vowel
+ consonant
big bigger not as big
thin thinner not as thin
fat fatter not as fat
hot hotter not as hot
fit fitter not as fit

4. drop the y and add /erto two- put not as before

syllable adjectives that end in y the adjective
happy happier not as happy
crazy crazier not as crazy
funny funnier not as funny
lonely lonelier not as lonely
lovely lovelier not as lovely
easy easier not as easy
lazy lazier not as lazy
noisy noisier not as noisy

5. add erto the following put not as before

two-syllable adjectives the adjective
able abler not as able
cruel crueler not as cruel
gentle gentler not as gentle
narrow narrower not as narrow
quiet quieter not as quiet
simple simpler not as simple

6. put more before other use not as or less

two-or-more-syllable adjectives before the adjective
capable more capable not as capable
less capable
careful more careful not as careful
less careful
cautious more cautious not as cautious
less cautious
common more common not as common
less common
decent more decent not as decent
less decent
dependable more dependable not as dependable
less dependable
68 Grammar §7.

difficult more difficult not as difficult

less difficult
expensive more expensive not as expensive
less expensive
famous more famous not as famous
less famous
gracious more gracious not as gracious
less gracious
grateful more grateful not as grateful
less grateful
handsome more handsome not as handsome
less handsome
idle more idle not as idle
less idle
important more important not as important
less important
jealous more jealous not as jealous
less jealous
modest more modest not as modest
less modest
patient more patient not as patient
less patient
pleasant more pleasant not as pleasant
less pleasant
polite more polite not as polite
less polite
popular more popular not as popular
less popular
responsible more responsible not as responsible
less responsible
ridiculous more ridiculous not as ridiculous
less ridiculous
thankful more thankful not as thankful
less thankful
trustworthy more trustworthy not as trustworthy
less trustworthy
truthful more truthful not as truthful
less truthful
wonderful more wonderful not as wonderful
less wonderful

7. use an irregular form for the following adjectives:

bad worse not as bad
far farther (in distance) not as far
far further (in depth) not as far
good better not as good
§7. Adjectives 69

little less not as much

many more not as many

To compare two nouns, use the positive comparative

form of the adjective + than:
A car is slower than a train.
This vase is finer than that one.
John is bigger than his brother.
The book is funnier than the movie.
These children are more polite than those.
My doctor is more patient than his partners.
Maria’s new car is more expensive than mine.
Is it better than yours?

For a negative comparison, use not as... as or

less... than:
A train is not as slow as a car.
That vase is not as fine as this one.
John’s brother is not as big as he is.
The movie is not as funny as the book.
Those children are not as polite as these.
My doctor’s partners are not as patient as he is.
My car is less expensive than Mary’s.
It’s not as good as yours.

8. to describe a gradual process, use the same compara-

tive adjective two times, with and.
The old car went slower and slower.
The balloon got bigger and bigger.
Her grades are better and better.
The weather is getting colder and colder.
The girl is more and more beautiful every day.

9. More comparisons
as (adjective) as
Your bag is as heavy as mine.
Your dress is as pretty as mine.
Her shoes are not as big as yours.
similar to
equal to in some ways
Your bag is similar to mine.
different from
not the same as
Your dress is different from mine.
70 Grammar §7-

different than
not the same as
Your dress is different than mine.

§7.2-7
Superlative A superlative adjective distinguishes one noun from three
Adjectives or more. To make an adjective superlative

1. put the before the adjective, and add st instead of r.

the slowest the nicest the biggest the funniest
the fastest the cutest the fattest the easiest

2. add the most instead of more before the adjective:

the most the most the most
important expensive ridiculous
the most the most the most
wonderful responsible untrustworthy

3. use the irregular form for the following adjectives:

good the best
bad the worst
far the farthest (in distance)
far the furthest (in depth)
many the most
little the least

To make a superlative negative, put the least before the

adjective:
the least funny the least expensive
the least polite the least important

To express superlatives, use the following patterns:

He is the tallest of the He is the tallest of all.
three boys.
That is the funniest movie It is the funniest of all.
I have ever seen.
Fred is the most handsome He is the most handsome
actor in the play. of all.
This is the most important This is the most important
part of the story. of all.
It was the worst storm this It was the worst of all.
year.
He is the least polite boy He is the least polite of
in the school. all.
That is the least important It is the least important
part of the report. of all.
§7. Adjectives 71

§7.3
ORDER OF 1. To describe a noun with several adjectives, use the
ADJECTIVES following order. It is better not to use more than three
descriptive adjectives together.

First, a noun determiner a, the, my; this, etc.

then, a subjective descriptive wonderful, crazy, tired,
adjective (the speaker’s etc.
opinion)
then, factual descriptive adjectives:
size big, small, huge, etc.
shape round, square, etc.
age young, new, old, etc.
color red, blue, yellow, etc.
origin American, Belgian, etc.
material wood, silk, glass, etc.
finally, the noun chair, chairs, furniture,
etc.
EXAMPLES
Three valuable old Chinese vases
My favorite pink silk blouse
Some beautiful old Mexican doors
A cheap little blue dress
A few wrinkled old black-and-white photographs
All the friendly new neighbors
A lot of pretty yellow silk ribbons

2. Adjective order exceptions:

(a) The adjective else, which means “another” or “dif-
ferent,” is placed after certain indefinite pronouns. It
answers the questions, “Who else?” “What
else?” and “Where else?”

Remember that some = positive

not any = negative

Question Answer Meaning

Who else is 1 don’t see anybody 1 don’t see another person.
here? else.
1 don’t see anyone 1 don’t see another person.
else.
Nobody else is here. No other person is here.
No one else is here. No other person is here.
1 think somebody 1 think another person is
else is here. here.
1 think someone else 1 think another person is
is here. here.
72 Grammar §7.

What else do you I don’t want anything I don’t want another thing.
want? else.
I want nothing else. I don’t want another thing.
Bring me something Bring me another thing.
else.
I need little else. I only need a few other
things.
I don’t need much I only need a few other
else. things.
Where else did He didn’t go He didn’t go to another
he go? anywhere else. place.
I think he went I think he went to another
somewhere else. place.

(b) Descriptive adjectives can also follow the indefinite

pronouns

anybody, anyone, anything, anywhere

nobody, no one, nothing,
somebody, someone, something, somewhere
little, not much

when they answer the question “What kind of?”

Question Answer Meaning

What kind of typist I need somebody a person who is good
do you need? good.
What kind of things They did nothing not anything that was
did they do? interesting. interesting
What kind of They don’t have not anything that is nice
furniture do they anything nice.
have?
What kind of car He needs something a car that is cheap
does he need? cheap.
What kind of place She is going a place that is warm
is she going to for somewhere warm.
her vacation?

(c) Enough can precede or follow a noun.

I have enough plates for twenty people.
I have plates enough for twenty people.
He doesn’t have enough money to buy a car.
He has money enough to buy a car.
§8.
Verbs—Introduction
A verb tells the state or action of a subject.
Verbs have three moods:
• the indicative, for most statements and questions
• the imperative, for commands
• the subjunctive, for expressing wishes and certain untrue
situations

Verbs have two voices:

• the active, for most statements and questions
In an active voice sentence, the subject is the
performer of the action of the verb.
An active voice sentence emphasizes the subject of
the sentence.
• the passive, for emphasizing the object
In a passive voice sentence, the subject is the receiver
of the action of the verb.

Verbs have a number of tenses. The verb tense indi-

cates the time of the action. In certain tenses, verbs change
according to the subject of the sentence.
The verb be changes in the present, the past, the
present progressive, and the past progressive
tenses.
All other verbs change in the he/she/it form in the
present tense and the present perfect tense.

The basic verb = the dictionary form

The infinitive = to + the basic verb
The present participle = the basic verb + ing
The past form = the basic verb + ed (Irregular past forms
are listed on pp. 330-332 of the appendix.)
The past participle = the basic verb + ed (Irregular past
participles are listed on pp. 330-332 of the appendix.)

73
74 Grammar §8.

SPELLING OF WORDS WITH ING AND ED SUFFIXES

-ED
Past Participles/
-ING Past Tense Forms/
Present Participles/ Certain Nouns Used
Verb _ Gerunds as Adjectives
ends in 2 start starting started
consonants end add ing ending add ed ended

ends in 2
vowels + clean add ing cleaning add ed cleaned
a consonant rain raining rained

ends in w sew add ing sewing add ed sewed

or x fix fixing fixed

two syllables, listen listening listened

first syllable open add ing opening add ed opened
stressed master mastering mastered

ends in vowel play add ing playing add ed played

+y obey obeying obeyed

ends in carry carrying carried

consonant study add ing studying drop y, studied
+y try trying add ied tried
cry crying cried

ends in ee agree add ing agreeing add d agreed

free freeing freed
see seeing (saw)

ends in ie die drop ie, dying add d died

lie add ying lying lied

ends in e tape drop e, taping add d taped

dance add ing dancing danced

one syllable, shop double the shopping double the shopped

ends in vowel beg consonant begging consonant begged
+ consonant sit add ing sitting add ed (sat)
get getting (got)

two syllables, occur double the occurring double the occurred

ends in vowel deter consonant deterring consonant deterred
+ consonant, permit add ing permitting add ed permitted
second syllable
stressed
 §9.
Verbs—Present Time
§9.1
PRESENT The present tense is used:
TENSE • to state facts
• to state habitual action.
It is not used to state present action—see §9.2.

§9.1-1
The Verb Be The verb be is different from all other English verbs.

1. The present tense forms are:

Singular Plural
i am we are
you are you are
he is they are
she is
it is

Am, is, and are can be combined with the subject to

make one word. This is a contraction. An apostrophe (’)
takes the place of the lost letter.
Singular Plural
1 am I’m we are we’re
you are you’re you are you’re
he is he’s they are they’re
she is she’s
Sue is Sue’s
it is it’s

To make forms of be negative, add not. Most negatives

can be contracted two ways. Use either way.
Subject + not Verb + not
1 am not I’m not
you are not you’re not you aren’t
he is not he’s not he isn’t
she is not she’s not she isn’t
it is not it’s not it isn’t
we are not we’re not we aren’t
you are not you’re not you aren’t
they are not they’re not they aren’t

75
76 Grammar §9.

To make questions, put the verb before the subject.

Affirmative Negative
Am 1? Am 1 not? (formal)
Aren’t 1? (informal)
Is he? Isn’t he?
Is she? Isn’t she?
Is it? Isn’t it?
Are we? Aren’t we?
Are you? Aren’t you?
Are they? Aren’t they?

To show a surprised response, use subject + verb + ?

Statement Surprised Response
You are the best student in the class. 1 am?
Ronald isn’t here yet. He isn’t? (He’s not?)
We’re not sisters. You’re not? (You aren’t?)

Questions are often answered with a short form:

Affirmative Negative
Yes, 1 am. No, I’m not.
Yes, he is. No, he’s not. No, he isn’t.
Yes, she is. No, she’s not. No, she isn’t.
Yes, it is. No, it’s not. No, it isn’t.
Yes, we are. No, we’re not. No, we aren’t.
Yes, you are. No, you’re not. No, you aren’t.
Yes, they are. No, they’re not. No, they aren’t.

2. Using be:
Be connects the subject of a sentence with a fact about
the subject. It has several different meanings.
(a) Be identifies the following noun or pronoun as the
same person, place, thing, or abstraction as the
subject.
Question Answer
Who are you? / am Joseph Carlson.
Who is she? She is the doctor.
Who are you? We are your assistants.
Who are your friends? They are Alex and Sam.
What is your name? My name is Bill Andrews.
What are their names? Their names are Michelle and
Bonnie.
What is this? It is a notebook.
What is that? It is the wind.
What are these? They are thumbtacks.
What are those? They are hangers.
§9. Verbs—Present Time 77

(b) Be + a possessive noun, pronoun, or adjective

identifies the owner of the subject.
Question Answer
Whose (coat) is this? That (coat) is Mary’s.
Whose hat is this? It’s hers.
Whose (shoes) are these? They are my shoes.
Whose gloves are those? They’re Larry’s.
They’re his.

(c) Be + a descriptive adjective describes the subject

or tells its condition.
Question Answer
What are you like? I’m athletic.
What is your friend like? She is serious.
What\s her house like? It is big.
What are the teachers like? They’re patient.
What color is the dress? It is blue.
What color are his eyes? They’re brown.
How are you? I’m fine.
How is Annette? She’s sick.
How are your parents? They’re better.

(d) Be + an adverb or prepositional phrase identifies

the location, origin, or time of the subject.
Question Answer
Location
Where is the car? It’s there. It’s in the garage.
Where are my keys? They’re here. They’re in my hand.

Origin
Where are you from? I’m from Virginia.
Where is he from? He’s from Ohio.
Where are they from? They’re from Egypt.
Where is your jewelry from? It’s from Afghanistan.

Time
When is the test? It’s soon. It’s on Monday.
When are the exams? They are later. They are in
December.
What time is the party? It’s at 9 o’clock. It’s at night.
What time is our meeting? It’s at 10:30. It’s in the morning.

(e) The subject there + be indicates the existence of

the following noun.
Use there is for a singular or non-count noun.
78 Grammar §9.

Singular Noun
What is there in the room? There is a lamp.
Is there a rug? Yes, there is.
Is there a piano? No, there isn’t.

Non-Count Noun
Is there any food in the kitchen? Yes, there is.
What is there in the refrigerator? There is milk.
Is there any cheese? Yes, there is.
Is there any yogurt? No, there isn’t.
How much cheese is there? There is plenty.

Use there are for a plural noun:

How many children are there There are three children.
in the family? There are three boys.

Use there are to indicate 0 (zero):

How many girls are there? There aren’t any girls
There are no girls.

(f) Use it + is to indicate the present time and the pre-

sent weather conditions.
Question Answer
What time is it? It is four o’clock.
It is 10:30 A.M.
It is midnight.
How is the weather? It’s fine.
It’s warm.
It’s windy.
It’s not raining.
It isn’t cold.

§9.1-2
The Present All verbs except be and models (§9.1-3) form the present
Tense of tense according to the charts below:

Verbs Other 1. Use the basic verb with the subjects I, you, we, and they
than Be Use do + subject + basic verb to make a question.
Use do + basic verb to make an emphatic response.
Use do + not (don’t) + basic verb to make a negative.
Use do or don’t without the basic verb to make a short
answer.
§9- Verbs—Present Time 79

Statement I/You/We/They work.

Question Do l/you/we/they work?
Short Answer Yes, l/you/we/they do.
Negative 1/YouA/Ve/They do not work.
Negative Short
Answer No, l/you/we/they don’t.

For most verbs, use the basic verb + s with the subjects
he, she, and it.
Use does + subject + basic verb to make a question.
Use does + not (doesn’t) + basic verb to make a
negative.
Use does or doesn’t without the basic verb to make a
short answer.

Statement He/She/It/ works.

Question Does he/she/it work?
Short Answer Yes, he/she/it does.
Negative He/She/It/ does not work.
Negative Short
Answer No, he/she/it doesn’t.

2. To spell the he, she, it form,

(a) add s to most basic verbs:
he works lives rises
she puts smiles praises
it laughs comes loses

(b) add es to verbs ending in o, ch, sh, ss, and x;

John goes watches kisses boxes
Ann does washes misses faxes

(c) for verbs ending in y after a consonant, drop the y

and add ies:
cry The baby cries
fly The airplane flies
study Susana studies
testify Terry testifies

(d) use has for the verb have:

Question Answer
What does she have in her hair? She has a ribbon.
What color car does he have? He has a red car.
What does his new car have? It has air-conditioning and a sun-roof.
80 Grammar §9.

3. Questions and statements

(a) Use verbs in the present tense to ask for or to state
facts.
Question Short Answer Long Answer
Do 1 need a license? Yes, you do. You need a license.
No, you don’t. You don’t need a
license.
Do you have a ticket? Yes, 1 do. 1 have a ticket.
No, 1 don’t. 1 don’t have a ticket.
Do we need an appointment? Yes, you do. You need an appoint-
ment.
No, you don’t. You don’t need an
appointment.
Do you need help? Yes, we do. We need help.
No, we don’t. We don’t need help.
Do they live here? Yes, they do. They live here.
No, they don’t. They don’t live here.
Does he have time? Yes, he does. He has time.
No, he doesn’t. He doesn’t have time.

To show a surprised response, use the subject + form of

do + ?
Statement Surprised Response
1 don’t like it. You don’t?
He doesn’t live here. He doesn’t?
We don’t have any money. You don’t?
They have a new baby. They do?
She works in that office. She does?

(b) Use information questions with the present tense to

learn facts.

Question word + do/does + subject + basic verb

(1) A linking verb, a verb that connects the subject

with an adjective or noun that describes the
subject, is used—see §4.
Question Answer
subject + linking verb + adjective
How do you feel? 1 feel tired.
How does she seem? She seems happy.
How does the food taste? It tastes great.
How does it smell? It smells delicious.
How does the chorus sound? It sounds good.
How does the house look? It looks beautiful.
How do 1 look? You look wonderful.
§9. Verbs—Present Time 81

Add like before a noun:

Question Answer
subject + linking verb + noun
Who do 1 look like? You look like your mother—
see §13.
Who does she sound like? She sounds like a rock star.
What does the music sound like? It sounds like a full orchestra.
What does the dessert taste like? It tastes like oranges and coconut.
What does the perfume smell like? It smells like gardenias.

(2) A direct object after the verb answers the

question—see §4.
Question Answer
What do you want? 1 want a new car.
What does he want? He wants a cookie.
What do you want? We want jobs.
What do they want? They want help.

Which color do you like? 1 like red.

Which color does she like? She likes blue.

How much jewelry do you have? 1 have a little.

How much money does he have? He has a lot.

How many books do they want? They want 100 books.

How many tickets do you need? We need five tickets.

(3) A prepositional phrase after the verb answers

the question—see §17.
Question Answer
Where do you live? 1 live in the city.
Where does Mike work? He works at the university.

Who do they study with? They study with their tutor.

Who does she talk to? She talks to her friends.

What school do they go to? They go to Spring Hill School.

What does he write with? He writes with a pencil.

(4) An adverb after the verb answers the question—

see §18.
Question Answer
Where do you live? 1 live nearby.
Where does Mike work? He works far away.

How do they speak English? They speak well.

How does Jackie drive? She drives fast.
82 Grammar §9.

(5) A frequency adverb before the verb expresses

general or habitual action—see §18.4.
Question Answer
When do you wear a coat? 1 never wear a coat.
When do you go out? 1 rarely go out.
When does he call you? He seldom calls me.
When does she visit you? She hardly ever visits me.
How often do you take trips? We occasionally take trips.
When do you dance? 1 often dance.
When do you eat early? We frequently eat early.

How often does she help them? She usually helps them.
How often do they arrive on time? They always arrive on time.

The adverb sometimes is an exception. Place it either

before the subject or at the end of the phrase.
How often does he wear a coat? Sometimes he wears a coat.
He wears a coat sometimes.

When no time expression is used,

a positive statement = sometimes
a negative statement = never
Question Answer Meaning
Do you drink coffee? Yes, 1 do. Sometimes 1 drink
1 drink coffee. coffee.
No, 1 don’t. 1 never drink coffee.
1 don’t drink coffee.

Does she wear glasses? Yes, she does. She wears glasses
She wears glasses. sometimes.

No, she doesn’t. She never wears

She doesn’t wear glasses.
glasses.

(6) You can also express a usual or habitual

activity with an adverbial or prepositional
phrase. Place it at the end of the sentence.
Question Answer
When do you wear a coat? 1 wear a coat in the winter.
When do you exercise? We exercise in the morning.
When do you rest? We rest in the afternoon.
When does he celebrate his He celebrates his birthday in July.
birthday?

When do they write letters? They write letters on weekends.

When do they stay home? They stay home on holidays.
§9. Verbs—Present Time 83

When do we have class? We have class on Mondays.

When does she study? She studies at night.
When does the movie start? It starts at 9 o’clock.

How often do you exercise? 1 exercise every day.

How often do you go to the store? 1 go every other day.
How often do you see her? 1 see her once a week.
How often does she take the
medicine? She takes it every three hours.
How often does he cook? He cooks once in a while.

To emphasize the time expression you can place it before

the subject.
Question Answer
What do you wear in the winter? In the winter 1 wear a coat.
What do they do on weekends? On weekends they write letters.
What do you do every day? Every day 1 go to the store.
What does she do at night? At night she studies.

(7) Because + subject + verb answers the question.

Question Answer
Why do you eat hot dogs? 1 eat hot dogs because 1 like them.
Why does he study so much? He studies because he wants to
learn.

(8) Using the information questions Who and What:

Who

(a) “Who...?” (in formal English, “Whom...?”)

refers to the object in the answer.
Use the pattern: Who(m) + do/does +
subject + verb ( + preposition).
Question Answer
Who(m) do you talk to? 1 talk to Jack.
Who(m) do we call? We call Sara.
Who(m) do they need? They need the teacher.
Who(m) does she want? She wants Val.

(b) “Who...” refers to the subject in the answer.

Use the pattern: Who + he, she, it verb. (Do
not use do or does in the question.)
Question Answer
Who talks to Jack? 1 talk to Jack.
Who calls Sara? We call Sara.
Who needs the teacher? They need the teacher.
Who wants Val? She wants Val.
84 Grammar §9.

Who likes ice cream? 1 like ice cream.

Who works on Wednesdays? We work on Wednesdays.
Who sings well? They sing very well.
Who lives here? Mary lives here.
Who travels a lot? Bill travels a lot.

Who with a subject answer is always followed by a singular

verb, even when the answer is plural.
Who likes ice cream? 1 do. He does. We do. They do.

Use do or does for short answers and for negative ques-

tions and answers.
Question Short Answer
Who likes ice cream? / do.
Who works on Wednesdays? We do.
Who sings well? They do.
Who lives here? Mary does.
Who travels a lot? Bill does.

Negative Question Short Answer Long Answer

Who doesn’t like ice cream? /don’t. /don’t like ice
cream.
Who doesn’t work on We don’t work on
Wednesdays? We don’t. Wednesdays.
Who doesn’t travel a lot? Bill doesn’t. Bill doesn’t travel a
lot.

Compare:
Hans calls Carol.
Who(m) does Hans call? He calls Carol.
Who calls Carol? Hans calls her. Hans does.

What

(a) “What...? refers to the direct object in the

answer.
Use do or does in the question:
Question Answer
What do you like? 1 like ice cream.
What does she like? She likes museums.
What do they want? They want a new car.

(b) When “What?” “Which?” or “Whose?” refer

to the subject in the answer, do not use
do/does in the question.
§9. Verbs—Present Time 85

Question Answer
What works? Nothing works.
What goes here? The dishes go there.
What happens now? The excitement happens now.
What comes next? The sad part comes next.
What causes the flu? Germs cause the flu.
What animals live on the farm? Cows and chickens live on the
farm.
Which cars park here? Small cars park here.
Whose dress needs ironing? Ann’s dress needs ironing.

What with a subject answer is always followed by a

singular verb, even when the answer is plural:

What goes here? The toaster goes there.

The dishes go there.

Use do/does in short answers and in negative questions

and answers:
Question Answer
What works? Nothing does.
What doesn’t work? The car doesn’t.
What happens now? The excitement does.
What comes next? The sad part does.
What causes the flu? Germs do.
What animals live on the farm? Cows and chickens do.
Which cars park here? Small cars do.
Whose dress needs ironing? Ann’s dress does.

§9.1-3
Modal A modal auxiliary is a word that comes before a verb and
Auxiliaries modifies its meaning.
The form is simple: use the same form for all persons.
in the Present Usage is tricky:
Tense • a modal may have a different meaning in another tense
• a modal may have a different meaning in the negative
• a modal may require a different modal as a response
• some modals have negative contractions; others don’t
• certain expressions with be and have have modal mean-
ings, but use the normal forms of those verbs.

Present Tense Modals

1. Can expresses ability.
86 Grammar §9-

Statement l/You/He/She/lt/We/They can work.

Question Can l/you/he/she/it/we/they work?
Short Answer Yes, l/you/he/she/it/we/they can.
Negative l/You/He/She/lt/We/They cannot/can’t work.
Negative Short No, l/you/he/she/it/we/they can’t.
Answer

Question Answer Meaning

What can you do? 1 can play the piano.
1 am able to play the
piano.
What can she do? She can play the guitar. She is able to play the
guitar.
Can he play the cello? No, he cannot. He is not able to play it.
No, he can’t.
Can they sing? Yes, they can. They are able to sing.

2. May and might express possibility. They both mean 7

don’t know if.”
Statement l/You/He/She/lt/We/They may/might work.
Question (not possible)
Negative l/You/He/She/!t/We/They may/might not work.
Contraction (not possible)

Question Answer Meaning

Is he sick? He may be sick. 1 don’t know if he is sick.
He might be sick.
Do you have the flu? 1 may have the flu. 1 don’t know if 1 have the
1 might have the flu. flu; 1 need to ask the
1 may not have the flu. doctor.
1 might not have the flu.

Another word with the same meaning is maybe, placed

before the subject:

Maybe I am sick.
Maybe I have the flu.

3. May and can ask for and give permission. They have
the same meaning, but may is more formal.
Statement You/He/She/They may work.
Question May l/he/she/we/they work?
Short Answer Yes, you/he/she/they may.
Negative You/He/She/They may not work.
Negative Short No, you/he/she/they may not.
Answer
§9- Verbs—Present Time 87

Question Answer Meaning

May we have the day off? Yes, you may. You have my
permission.
No, you may not. You do not have my
permission.
May 1 borrow your Yes, you may. You have my
book? permission.
No, you may not. You do not have my
permission.
Can 1 borrow your Yes, you can. You have my
book? permission.
No, you can’t. You do not have my
permission.

4. Can, could, will, and would ask for assistance.

Use please before the verb or at the end of the phrase:
Question Answer
Can you please open the door? Sure!
Could you please open the door? I’ll be glad to!
Will you open the door, please? Yes, 1 will.
Would you open the door, please? I’m sorry. 1 can’t help you./Yes, 1 will.

5. Should, ought to, and had better express advice.

Statement l/You/He/She/lt/We/They should work.
Question Should l/you/he/she/it/we/they work?
Short Answer Yes, l/you/he/she/it/we/they should.
Negative l/You/He/She/lt/We/They shouldn’t work.
Negative Short No, l/you/he/she/it/we/they shouldn’t.
Answer

Statement l/You/He/She/lt/We/They ought to work.

Question (use should)
Short Answer (use should)
Negative l/You/He/She/lt/We/They ought not to work.
Negative Short Answer
(use should)

Statement l/You/He/She/lt/We/They had better work.

Question
(use should)
Short Answer Yes, l/you/he/she/it/we/they ’d better.
Negative l/You/He/She/lt/We/They had better not work.
Negative Short No, l/you/he/she/it/we/they ’d better not.
Answer
88 Grammar §9-

Advice Meaning
You should arrive on time. It is important that you arrive on time.
You ought to arrive on time.
You shouldn’t go alone. It is important that you not go alone.
You ought not to go alone.
You had better arrive on time. It is very important that you arrive on
You’d better not arrive late. time.

6. Must and have to express necessity or requirement.

Must is a modal; have to is conjugated like have.
Use have to or has to (not must) for questions and
negative statements.
Statement 1/You/He/She/ltA/Ve/They must work.
Question (use have to)
Short Answer (use have to)
Negative (use have to)

Statement l/You/We/They have to work.

Question Do l/you/we/they have to work?
Short Answer Yes, l/you/we/they do.
Negative I/You/We/They don’t have to work.
Negative Short No, l/you/we/they don’t.
Answer

Statement He/She/It has to work.

Question Does he/she/it/ have to work?
Short Answer Yes, he/she/it/ does.
Negative He/She/It doesn’t have to work.
Negative Short No, he/she/it doesn’t.
Answer

Question Answer Meaning

What do you have to do? I have to study. It is necessary for me
What do you have to do? I must study. to study.

Do you have to study? I don’t have to It is not necessary for

study. me to study.

7. Must not expresses prohibition.

Statement l/You/He/She/lt/We/They must not work.
Question (Use
may)
Short Answer No, l/you/he/she/it/we/they mustn’t.
§9- Verbs—Present Time 89

Warning Meaning
You must not cross the street here. Do not cross the street here; it is
dangerous.
She must not drive without a Don’t allow her to drive without a
license. license.
They mustn’t make any noise. Do not allow them to make any
noise.

8. Must can mean probably.

Statement l/You/He/She/lt/We/They must be lost.
Question (not possible)
Negative l/You/He/She/lt/We/They must not be lost.

Question Answer Meaning

Why isn’t he here? He must be lost. He is probably lost.
Why is she coughing? She must have a cold. She probably has a
cold.
Why do they speak so They must practice They probably practice
well? a lot. a lot.
Why is he resting? He must not* be busy. He’s probably not busy.

*Do not contract must not when the meaning is probably.

9. Would like to expresses desire, politely.

Statement l/You/He/She/We/They would like to work.
Question Would you/he/she/they like to work?
Short Answer Yes, l/you/he/she/we/they would.
Negative l/You/He/She/We/They wouldn’t like to work.
Negative Short No, l/you/he/she/we/they wouldn’t.
Answer

Question Answer Meaning

What would you like to do? I’d like to walk. 1 want to walk.
What would your friend like to do? She’d like to rest. She wants to rest.
Would you like a cup of coffee? Yes, 1 would, Yes, please.
thanks.
Would you like a sandwich? No, thank you. No, thank you.
1 wouldn’t.

10. Would rather expresses preference.

Statement l/You/He/She/We/They would rather work.
Question Would you/he/she/they rather work?
Short Answer Yes, l/you/he/she/we/they would.
Negative l/You/He/She/We/They would rather not work.
Negative Short No, l/you/he/whe/we/they wouldn’t.
Answer
90 Grammar §9-

Question Answer Meaning

Would you rather dance or 1 would rather
watch TV? dance.
What would you rather do? I’d rather dance. 1 prefer to dance.
What would they rather do? They’d rather They prefer to
watch TV. watch TV.
Would your friend rather dance? Yes, he would. He prefers to
dance.
No, he wouldn’t. He prefers not to
dance.

§9.2
PRESENT Use the present progressive tense—not the present tense—
PROGRESSIVE to express action in progress now.
To make the present progressive tense, use a form of
TENSE be + a present participle (a basic verb + ing). (See p. 74.)
Statement 1 am working.
Question Am 1 working?
Short Answer Yes, 1 am.
Negative 1 am (’m) not working.
Negative Short No, 1 ’m not.
Answer

Statement You/We/They are working.

Question Are you/we/they working?
Short Answer Yes, you/we/they are.
Negative You/We/They are not working.
Negative Short No, you/we/they aren’t.
Answer

Statement He/She/It is working.

Question Is he/she/it working?
Short Answer Yes, he/she/it is.
Negative He/She/It/ is not working.
Negative Short No, he/she/it isn’t.
Answer

Present progressive action began in the past and is not

finished.
Use now, at this time, at the moment, this week, this
month, this year, this summer, this afternoon, this
evening, or tonight (when the meaning is “now”) after the
present participle.
§9- Verbs—Present Time 91

Question Answer Meaning

What are you doing? 1 am studying. It is 3:00. 1 began to
study at 2:30; 1 am
not finished.
Who is talking? Joe is talking. Joe began to talk ten
minutes ago. He is not
finished.
What are they doing They are It is July. They started to
this summer? working. work in June. They are
not finished.

§9.2-1
Separated Use still with the present progressive to emphasize the
Progressive length of the action. Use not anymore to tell that the action
finally stopped.
Forms Still and not separate be from the present participle.

Pattern: subject + be + still + present participle.

subject + be + not+ present participle + anymore.

Question Answer Meaning

Are they still sleeping? Yes, they are. They continue to be
They are still asleep.
sleeping.
Are you still working? No, I’m not. 1 stopped working.
I’m not working
anymore. 1 no longer work.

Adverbs that intensify the action of the verb always

separate be and the ing form—see §18.6.
We are really enjoying our vacation.
He is hardly working.

Do not use frequency adverbs, such as sometimes,

never, occasionally, seldom, etc.—see §18.4—with the
present progressive.
Informally, always used with the present progressive
indicates annoyance or worry. It separates be from the ing
form.
Statement Meaning
He is always calling me. 1 am annoyed that he calls.
She is always talking in class. It bothers me that she talks in class.
They are always telling secrets. It annoys me that they tell secrets.
He is always scratching his arms. 1 think he might have the measles.
She is always sneezing. Maybe she has an allergy.
92 Grammar §9-

Adverbs and prepositional phrases that tell the time,

location, or manner of the action can be placed either
between be and the ing form or at the end of the phrase.
EXAMPLES
She is now working on or She is working on her
her master’s degree. master’s degree now.
He is at present studying He is studying law at
law. present.

We are here playing We are playing tennis

tennis. here.
They are at home They are waiting for
waiting for us. us at home.
They are outside playing. They are playing outside.
They are in the house They are cooking in the
cooking. house.

I am alone reading in I am reading in the library

the library. alone.
They are happily playing They are playing outside
outside. happily.

§9.2-2
Non- Certain verbs express facts that do not require conscious
Progressive effort. Use the present tense—not the present progres-
sive—for these verbs.
Verbs
(a) verbs similar in meaning to be:
be, exist, appear, seem, smell, taste
EXAMPLES Do Not Use:
Who is she? She is a teacher. She is being a teacher.
How does it seem It seems unfair. It is seeming unfair.
to you?
How is this perfume? It smells good. It is smelling good.
Do you like the ice
cream? It tastes good. It is tasting good.

(b) verbs that express knowledge, state of mind, or

opinion:
believe, know, think, understand, remember, forget
§9. Verbs—Present Time 93

EXAMPLES Do Not Use:

Do you believe in I don’t believe in I am not believing in
ghosts? ghosts. ghosts.
Does he know the He doesn’t know it. He isn’t knowing it.
secret?
What does your She thinks it’s She is thinking it’s
mother think? wonderful. wonderful.
Do you understand Yes. I understand it. I am understanding it.
the lesson?
Does she remember No. She doesn’t She isn’t remembering
me? remember you. you.

(c) verbs that express possession;

have, own, contain

EXAMPLES Do Not Use:

Do you have a car? Yes. I have a car. I am having a car.
Does he own a
house? He owns a house. He is owning a house.
What does this box It contains books. It is containing books.
contain?

(d) verbs that express automatic use of the senses:

see, hear, smell

EXAMPLES Do Not Use:

What do you see? I see what is in front I am seeing what is in
of me. front front of me.
Do you hear a No. I don’t hear I am not hearing
strange noise? anything. anything.
Do you smell some- Yes. I smell smoke. I am smelling smoke.
thing burning?

(e) verbs that express desire, necessity, or preference:

want, need, prefer, like, love, hate

EXAMPLES Do Not Use:

What does he want? He wants a cold drink. He is wanting a cold
drink.
Do they need They need books. They are needing books.
anything?
What color does She prefers red. She is preferring red.
she prefer?
What kind of ice I like chocolate ice I am liking chocolate
cream do you like? cream. ice cream.
Does he love her? Yes. He loves her. He is loving her.
Does she like the No. She hates it. She is hating it.
apartment?
94 Grammar §9.

When these verbs express a conscious effort or action,

they are used in the present progressive, and have a
different meaning.

being acting on purpose, or pretending

thinking concentrating one’s mind
remembering concentrating one’s mind on a past
event
seeing a person dating a person
smelling consciously trying to detect or
distinguish an odor
loving enjoying a temporary experience
hating disliking a temporary experience

EXAMPLES Meaning:
He is being difficult. He is not cooperating.
I am thinking about My mind is concentrated on you.
you.
She is remembering She is thinking about the day she
her wedding. got married.
She is seeing She is dating a special person.
someone special.
We are smelling all We are sniffing all the perfumes to
the perfumes. distinguish them.
They are loving every They are enjoying their vacation.
minute of their
vacation.
She is hating her She is unhappy in the hospital.
stay in the hospital.

When have means “to temporarily experience,” it can be

used in the present progressive.
EXAMPLES Meaning:
We are having lunch. We are eating lunch.
She is having a She is enjoying the occasion.
good time.
They are having fun. They are enjoying the occasion.
He is having trouble He can’t find a parking space.
parking.
They are having an They are arguing.
argument.
We are having a We are meeting with each other.
meeting.
She is having a She is entertaining friends.
party.
§9. Verbs—Present Time 95

§9.3
PRESENT The present perfect tense explains the present in terms of
PERFECT past experience at an unspecified time.
Use a present tense form of have + the past participle
TENSE of a verb.
Statement 1/YouA/Ve/They have worked.
Question Have l/you/we/they worked?
Short Answer Yes, l/you/we/they have.
Negative 1/YouA/Ve/They have not worked.
Negative Short No, l/you/we/they haven’t.
Answer

Statement He/She/It has worked.

Question Has he/she/it worked?
Short Answer Yes, he/she/it has.
Negative He/She/It has not worked.
Negative Short No, he/she/it hasn’t.
Answer

For the present perfect,

(a) to express an action that started in the past and is still

occurring, use

for + a length of time

since + a specific time or date

Question Answer Meaning

How long have 1 have lived here for four 1 began to live here in
you lived here? years. the past and 1 stilll live
here.
1 have lived here since
1992.

(b) to indicate experience, use

ever and never before the past participle

before, once, twice, three times, many times
at the end of the phrase
96 Grammar §9.

Question Answer
Have you ever driven Yes, 1 have. 1 have driven a truck
a truck? before.
No, 1 haven’t. 1 have never driven
a truck.
How many times have you
been in Mexico? 1 have been in Mexico four times.
How many times has he He has seen it five times.
seen that movie?

(c) to explain a present condition, use already or not yet

Pattern: have + already + past participle

have + not + past participle + yet

Condition Reason
1 am not hungry because 1 have already eaten.
He does not want to see
that movie because he has already seen it.
We are tired because we have not slept yet.
She is hungry because she has not eaten yet.

(d) to indicate that the action is not finished, use so far or

not yet at the end of the phrase.

Question Answer Meaning

What have you done 1 have taken half of 1 plan to take the
(so far)? my medicine. other half later.
How far has he walked? He has walked four He plans to walk
miles. more.
Have you finished We haven’t finished We are still eating
eating dinner yet? yet. dinner.

(e) to indicate expectation of an action, use yet at the end

of the phrase.
Question Answer Meaning
Have you seen him? 1 haven’t seen him 1 expect to see him
yet. later.
Has she cooked dinner? She hasn’t cooked She plans to cook
dinner yet. dinner later.
Have they arrived yet? No, they haven’t. They are not here.
We expect them later.
§9- Verbs—Present Time 97

(f) to indicate that an action happened a very short time

ago, use just or finally.

Pattern: have + just + past participle

have + finally + past participle

Question Answer
Have they arrived yet? Yes, they have. They have just arrived.
What has happened? The president has just left.
Our team has just won the tournament.
We have finally finished.

§9 4
PRESENT The present perfect progressive emphasizes action in
PERFECT progress in the past.
Use the present tense of have + been + present
PROGRESSIVE participle.
TENSE Use all day, all night, all week, all year, for (a length
of time), since (an exact time).
Statement I/You/We/They have been working.
Question Have l/you/we/they been working?
Short Answer Yes, l/you/we/they have.
Negative I/You/We/They have not been working.
Negative Short No, l/you/we/they haven’t.
Answer

Statement He/She/It has been working.

Question Has he/she/it been working?
Short Answer Yes, he/she/it has.
Negative He/She/It has not been working.
Negative Short No, he/she/it/ hasn’t.
Answer

Question Answer
What have you been doing all day? I’ve been studying.
How long has he been driving? He has been driving for six hours.
Where have they been hiding? They have been hiding in the
garage since ten o’clock this
morning.
Where have you been staying? We’ve been staying with my
sister.
 §10.
Verbs—Past Time
§10.1
PASTTENSE The past tense indicates a situation or action that started
and ended before now.
Use before, then, yesterday, last night, last week,
last month, last year, five minutes ago, after that at the
beginning or the end of the phrase.

§10.1-1
The Past The past tense forms of be are:
Tense Statement I/He/She/It was there.
of Be Question Was l/he/she/it there?
Short Answer Yes, l/he/she/it was.
Negative l/he/she/it was not there.
Negative Short No, l/he/she/it wasn’t.
Answer

Statement You/We/They were there.

Question Were you/we/they there?
Short Answer Yes, you/we/they were.
Negative You/We/They were not there.
Negative Short No, you/we/they weren’t.
Answer

Question Answer
What was that noise last night? That was the wind.
Whose coat was this before? It was my sister’s coat.
What was your mother like then? She was brilliant.
What color was this dress before It was blue.
you washed it?
When was the test? It was yesterday.
What was there in the room before? There was a lamp.
What time was it when he called? It was five-thirty.
How was the weather last week? It was rainy.
Was the test hard? Yes, it was.
Was it long? No, it wasn’t.
How were you last night? I was sick.
Where were you? I was at home.
Were you alone? Yes, I was.
Were you lonely? No, I wasn’t.

98
§10. Verbs—Past Time 99

Where were your keys? They were in my pocket.

How many people were there? There were ten people.
Were my friends there? Yes, they were.
Were they unhappy? No, they weren’t.

§10.1-2
The Past The past tense form of all other verbs is the same for all
Tense of persons.
• Use the subject + a past tense form for a positive statement.
Verbs Other • Use did + a basic verb for questions, negatives, and
than Be short answers.

Statement l/You/He/She/lt/We/They worked.

Question Did l/you/he/she/it/we/they work?
Short Answer Yes, l/you/he/she/it/we/they did.
Negative l/You/He/She/lt/We/They did not work.
Negative Short No, l/you/he/she/it/we/they didn’t.
Answer

To make the past tense form of many verbs, add edto

the basic verb, or d to a verb that ends in e.

ed d
walked danced
helped changed
laughed believed

When the basic verb ends in y after a consonant, drop

the y and add ied.

cry cried
try tried
study studied
testify testified

For other spellings with ed, see page 74. Many verbs
have irregular past tense forms. A list of common irregular
verbs is on pp. 330-332 of the appendix.
EXAMPLES
Question Affirmative Answer Negative Answer
What did you do? 1 ran to the store. 1 didn’t run.
What did he do? He went to the movies. He didn’t go.
What did you do? We read in the afternoon. We didn’t read.
What did they do? They slept nine hours. They didn’t sleep.
100 Grammar §10.

Question Affirmative Short Negative Short

Answer Answer
Did you run? Yes, 1 did. No, 1 didn’t.
Did he go? Yes, he did. No, he didn’t.
Did you read? Yes, we did. No, we didn’t.
Did they sleep ? Yes, they did. No, they didn’t.

§10.1-3
Modais in Meaning Present Past Past Negative
the Past ability can could couldn’t
permission may was allowed to wasn’t allowed to
could couldn’t
possibility may may have + may not have
past participle
might might have + might not have
past participle
advice should should have + should not have +
past participle past participle
necessity have to had to didn’t have to
must
probability must must have + must not have
past participle + past participle

Question Short Answer Long Answer

(1) ability
Were you able to work? Yes, 1 was. 1 was able to work.
No, 1 wasn’t. 1 wasn’t able to work.
Could you work? Yes, 1 could. 1 could work.
No, 1 couldn’t. 1 couldn’t work.
(2) permission
Was she allowed to work? Yes, she was. She was allowed to
work.
No, She wasn’t. She wasn’t allowed to.
(3) possibility
Did he work? He may have. He may have worked.
He may not have. He may not have
worked.
He might have. He might have worked.
He might not He might not have
have. worked.
(4) advice
Should we have worked? Yes, you should You should have
have. worked.
No, you shouldn’t You shouldn’t have
have. worked.
(5) necessity
Did they have to work? Yes, they did. They had to work.
No, they didn’t. They didn’t have to
work.
§10. Verbs—Past Time 101

(6) probability
Did he work? Yes, he must have. He must have worked.
No, he must not He must not have
have. worked.

§10.2
PAST The past progressive describes an action in progress when
PROGRESSIVE something else happened.
Use the past of be + a present participle.
TENSE
Statement I/He/She/It was working.
Question Was l/he/she/it working?
Short Answer Yes, l/he/she/it was.
Negative I/He/She/It was not working.
Negative Short No, l/he/she/it wasn’t.
Answer

Statement You/We/They were working.

Question Were you/we/they working?
Short Answer Yes, you/we/they were.
Negative You/We/They were not working.
Negative Short No, you/we/they weren’t.
Answer

Always relate the past progressive action with a time or

an event in the past tense.

Question Past Time Past Progressive

or Event Action
What were you doing at ten o’clock? 1 was sleeping.
What was he doing at that time? He was working.
What was she doing when 1 arrived? She was sleeping.
What were they doing when it started to rain? They were having a
picnic.
What were you doing then? We were dancing.

Another pattern is as follows:

when
while + subject + present participle + comma + past event
as

EXAMPLES
When they were eating, the phone rang.
When we were dancing, John called.
While they were having a picnic, it started to rain.
As I was walking to the store, I fell down.
102 Grammar §10.

Compare the past progressive tense with the past tense:

Statement Meaning
My friends were laughing when They started laughing before
1 arrived at the party. 1 arrived.
My friends laughed when 1 arrived They began to laugh when
at the party. 1 arrived.
She was crying when he left. She started to cry before he left.
She cried when he left. She started to cry after he left.

Describe two past progressive events that were hap-

pening at the same time as follows:

When they were dancing, we were watching television.

While you were talking on the phone, I was washing the
dishes.
As he was walking down the street, he was singing.

§10.2-1
Separated Still and not always separate the be from the ing form —
Progressive see §18.2.
They were still talking on the phone when I left.
Forms When I got home, they were not talking on the
phone anymore.

Adverbs of intensity—see §18.7—also come between

the be form and the ing form.
He was hardly paying attention.
She was really trying.

Adverbs of location, time, and manner—see §18.1,

18.2, and 18.5—can come between the be and ing forms or
at the end of the phrase.

EXAMPLES
He was there watching TV. He was watching TV there.
She was in bed sleeping. She was sleeping in bed.
We were later walking down We were walking down
the street. the street later.
I was slowly driving home. I was driving home slowly.

§10.2-2
Non- Verbs that express facts that did not require conscious
Progressive effort are not used in the past progressive, even when they
have a progressive meaning. Use the past tense for most
Verbs in the instances of the following verbs (see §9.2-2):
Past
§10. Verbs—Past Time 103

(a) verbs similar in meaning to be:

be, exist, appear, seem, smell, taste

EXAMPLES Do Not Use:

Who was the teacher? Miss Smith was Miss Smith was being
the teacher. the teacher.
How did it seem to you? It seemed unfair. It was seeming unfair.
Was it true? It appeared to be It was appearing to be
true. true.
Did you like my It smelled good. It was smelling good.
perfume?
How were the pies? They tasted good. They were tasting good.

(b) verbs that express knowledge, state of mind, or opinion:

believe, know, think, understand, remember, forget

EXAMPLES Do Not Use:

Did you believe her? I believed her. I was believing her.
Did you know him then? I didn’t know him. I wasn’t knowing him.
What did they think They thought it They were thinking it
about your haircut? was beautiful. was beautiful.
Did you understand I didn’t understand it. I wasn’t understanding it.
the lecture?
Did she remember She didn’t She wasn’t
her promise? remember it. remembering it.
She forgot it. She was forgetting it.

(c) verbs that express possession:

have, own, contain

EXAMPLES Do Not Use:
Did you have enough No. I didn’t have No. I wasn’t having
money? enough. enough.
Did she own a car? Yes. She owned Yes. She was owning
a car. a car.
What did the bottle It contained poison. It was containing poison.
contain?

(d) verbs that express automatic use of the senses:

see, hear, smell

EXAMPLES Do Not Use:

What did you see in I saw three women. I was seeing three
the picture? women.
Did you hear the news? Yes. I heard it. Yes. I was hearing it.
Did you smell smoke? No. I didn’t smell No. I wasn’t smelling
anything. anything.
104 Grammar §10.

(e) verbs that express desire, necessity, or preference:

want, need, prefer, like, love, hate

EXAMPLES Do Not Use:

What did they want? They wanted to buy They were wanting to buy
a diamond. a diamond.
Did you need a towel? No. I didn’t need No. I wasn’t needing one.
one.
Which one did you I preferred the red I was preferring the
prefer? one. red one.
Did you like her dress? Yes. I liked it. Yes. I was liking it.
Did she love him? No. She didn’t love No. She wasn’t loving
him. him.

When these verbs express a conscious effort or action

in the past, they are used in the past progressive, and have
a different meaning.

being acting on purpose, or pretending

thinking concentrating one’s mind
remembering concentrating one’s mind on a past
event
seeing a person dating a person
smelling consciously trying to detect or
distinguish an odor
loving enjoying a temporary experience
hating disliking a temporary experience
having experiencing a temporary occasion

EXAMPLES Meaning:
She was being silly. She was behaving in a silly manner.
He was being so kind to me. He was treating me kindly.
We were thinking about you. Our minds were concentrated on you.
They were remembering They were reminiscing about old times.
old times.
He was seeing her regularly. He was dating her regularly.
The dogs were smelling The dogs were trying to detect a scent.
the boxes.
They were loving their They were enjoying their vacation until
vacation until she got sick. she got sick.
I was having dinner when I was eating dinner when you called.
you called.
She was having a good time. She was enjoying the occasion.
We were having fun. We were enjoying the occasion.
Were you having trouble Were you experiencing difficulties with
with the machine? the machine?
They were having an They were arguing.
argument.
We were having a meeting. We were meeting together.
They were having a party. They were celebrating.
§10. Verbs—Past Time 105

§10.2-3
Was Going Was going to + basic verb indicates past intentions. Use
To... with but...

Statement Meaning
1 was going to call Mary, but 1 planned to call Mary, but didn’t
1 fell asleep. because 1 was asleep.
He was going to go to the party, He planned to go to the party. He
but he got sick. didn’t go because he was sick.
They were going to get married, They planned to get married. They
but her mother disapproved. didn’t because her mother
disapproved.

§10.3
USED TO... Used to + basic verb indicates a fact in the past that is not
true now.
The form is the same for all persons.
Statement Meaning
She used to be the mayor. She was the mayor before; she is not
the mayor now.
We used to be friends. We were friends before; we are not
friends now.
1 used to live in Europe. 1 lived in Europe before; 1 don’t live
in Europe now.
He used to smoke. He was a smoker; now he never
smokes.
They used to visit me. They visited me regularly before;
now they never visit me.

The past tense + a past time expression may be

used as an alternative to “used to.”

EXAMPLES
I used to play with dolls. = I played with dolls then.
They used to call me. = They called me in those
days.

§10.4
WOULD Would + basic verb indicates “usually” or “always” in the past.
The form is the same for all persons. Use would to
reminisce about the past.

EXAMPLE
“When we were children, on Sundays we would always go
to our grandmother’s house. I would play with my cousin.
My grandmother would always make a big dinner, and the
106 Grammar §10.

whole family would eat at her big table. After dinner, we

would all wash the dishes, and it was fun. My mother
would always talk to her mother in the kitchen for a long
time, and then we would go home.”

A frequency expression + the past tense may be

used as an alternative to this use of would.

EXAMPLES
We would visit on We often visited on
Sundays. Sundays.
They would read stories They usually read stories
to us. to us.
He would never help He never helped me.
me.

§10.5
PAST The past perfect relates two past actions. Like a “flashback”
PERFECT in a movie, it tells a past event that happened before
another past event.
TENSE Use /?ad+ past participle.
Statement 1/You/He/She/ltA/Ve/They had worked.
Question Had l/you/he/she/it/we/they worked?
Short Answer Yes, l/you/he/she/it/we/they had.
Negative 1/You/He/She/ltA/Ve/They had not worked.
Negative Short No, l/you/he/she/it/we/they hadn’t.
Answer

Use the past perfect with for, since, before, ever, never,
once, twice, already, yet, so far, by then, just, finally.

(a) Use the past perfect with the first event. Use the past
tense with the later event.

EXAMPLES
We lived in New York from 1990 to 1995. We moved to Los
Angeles in 1995.
We had lived in New York for five years when we moved to
Los Angeles.
Jane went to Mexico three times last year. She went back
this year.
Jane had gone to Mexico three times before this trip.
§10. Verbs—Past Time 107

Steve took his first trip to Hong Kong last summer.

Steve had never been in Hong Kong before last summer.
John ate lunch at one o’clock. At one-thirty, Mr. Smith
invited John to eat with him.
John had already eaten lunch when Mr. Smith invited him.

(b) To emphasize the result of the first action, mention the

later event first.

EXAMPLES
Tai won the election on Friday. On Saturday he had a big
party.
Tai had a party because he had finally won the election.
Mike didn’t read the newspaper. He didn’t know the news.
Mike didn’t know the news because he hadn’t read the
paper yet.
Kathleen didn’t do her homework yesterday. She couldn’t
go to the party last night.
Kathleen couldn’t go to the party because she hadn’t done
her homework.
Brenda didn’t study for the test. She failed the test.
Brenda failed the test because she hadn’t studied.

§10.6
PAST PERFECT The past perfect progressive emphasizes action that was in
PROGRESSIVE Pr°9ress before another past event.
Use had been + present participle.

Statement l/You/He/She/lt/We/They had been working.

Question Had l/you/he/she/it/we/they been working?
Short Answer Yes, l/you/he/she/it/we/they had.
Negative 1/You/He/She/ltA/Ve/They had not been working.
Negative Short No, l/you/he/she/it/we/they hadn’t.
Answer

EXAMPLES
Question Answer
What had you been doing before I had been studying for five years.
you started to work?
Where had she been living before She had been living in an
she bought this house? apartment for a long time.
How long had he been driving He had been driving for three
when he fell asleep? hours.
 §11-
Verbs—Future Time
The future tenses express expectation of action.
Use later, tonight, tomorrow, day after tomorrow,
next Tuesday, next week, next January, next month, next
year, soon, some time, ten years from now, at ten
o’clock, before the subject or after the verb.
There are several ways to express future time.

§11.1
PRESENT Use the present progressive tense with a future time
PROGRESSIVE expression.
USED FOR Question Answer
THE FUTURE What are you doing tomorrow? 1 am studying tomorrow.
What is she doing next week? She is flying to San Antonio next
week.
What is he speaking about He is speaking about health care
next Friday? next Friday.
What are you wearing to the We are wearing blue jeans tonight.
party tonight?
When are they coming home? They are coming home next month.
Are you working tomorrow? Yes, 1 am.
Is she coming home next week? No, she isn’t.

§11.2
BE GOING Use a form of be + going to + a basic verb.
TO... Question Answer
What are you going to do 1 am going to study tomorrow.
tomorrow?
What is she going to do next She is going to fly to San Antonio.
week?
What is he going to speak about He is going to speak about health
next Friday? care next Friday.
What are you going to wear to We are going to wear jeans.
the party?
When are they going to come They are going to come home
home? next month.

108
§11. Verbs—Future Time 109

Short answers and negatives are the same as for the

present progressive.
Question Answer
Are you going to study medicine? Yes, I am. No, I’m not.
Is he going to call you tonight? Yes, he is. No, he isn’t.
Are they going to eat? Yes, they are. No, they aren’t.

§11.3
WILL AND Use a modal auxiliary: may, might, should, or will + a
OTHER MODAL basic verb to express possibility, probability, promises, or
predictions. The forms are the same for all persons.
AUXILIARIES
1. Use may, might, or maybe when there is a 50 percent
possibility of the action.
Question Answer Negative Answer
What are you doing 1 may work. 1 may not work.
tomorrow? 1 might work. 1 might not work
Maybe 1 will work. Maybe 1 won’t work.
What is he going to He may work. He may not work.
do tomorrow? He might work. He might not work.
Maybe he will work. Maybe he won’t work

Question Short Negative Short

Answer Answer
Are they going to work They may. They may not.
tomorrow? They might. They might not.
Maybe. Maybe not.

2. Use should to express expectation (99 percent possibility).

Question Answer
What time are you going to We should get there around
get here? eight o’clock.
When are you going to know 1 should know it tomorrow morning.
the answer?

3. Use will probably when there is a 90 percent possibility

of the action.
Question Answer
Are you working tomorrow? 1 will probably work.
Is he going to work tomorrow? He will probably work.

4. Use probably won’t when there is a 10 percent possi-

bility of the action.
110 Grammar §11-

Question Answer
Are you working tomorrow? 1 probably won’t work.
Is he going to work tomorrow? He probably won’t work.

5. Use will + you to request action.

Will you (please) work tomorrow?
Will you help me next week?

6. Use will to make a promise or commitment.

Question Answer Short Answer

Will you please work 1 will work. Yes, 1 will.
tomorrow?
Will your son help? My son will help, too. Yes, he will.

7. Use won’t to refuse to act.

Question Answer Short Answer

Will you work for me? 1 won’t work for you No, 1 won’t.
Will he help me? He won’t help you. No, he won’t.

8. Use willto predict the future.

Question Answer
What will happen in the We will travel to the moon for
twenty-first century? a vacation.
My baby will be a doctor.

9. Other modals in the future are:

Meaning Present Future Future Negative
ability can will be able to won’t be able to
permission may will be allowed to won’t be allowed to
assistance can will be able to won’t be able to
will will be glad to won’t be able to
necessity must will have to won’t have to
have to will have to won’t have to
desire would like will want to won’t want to

EXAMPLES
I can’t sleep. After I take my medicine, I will be able to sleep.
He can’t play the piano, and he won’t be able to play
unless he practices.
You may not leave the room during the test. You will be
allowed to leave when the test is over.
She doesn’t have to take the test now, but she will have to
take it before next semester.
I wouldn’t like to eat now, but I will want to eat before I go
to bed.
§11- Verbs—Future Time 111

§11.4
PRESENT (a) Use the present tense for a scheduled future event.
TENSE USED Question Answer
FOR THE When is the party? It is tomorrow.
FUTURE What time does the movie start?
When do they leave for the beach?
It starts at seven o’clock.
They leave next week

(b) Use a present tense verb after before, after, as soon

as, and when to express future time.
Pattern:
Future Time Present
Tense Expression Tense
1 am going to leave before he gets here.
He is speaking after the chairman speaks.
She will come as soon as she finishes.
They should be here when you arrive.
1 might cry when 1 say goodbye.

§11.5
FUTURE The future progressive tense expresses action that will
PROGRESSIVE be in progress in the future.
To make the future progressive tense, use will be + a
TENSE present participle.
Statement l/you/he/she/it will be working.
we/they
Question Will be working?
Short Answer Yes, will.
Negative won’t be working.
Negative Short No, won’t.
Answer

Future progressive action may or may not have already

begun; it will not be finished at the indicated future time.
Question Answer
What will you be doing tomorrow 1 will be studying
at noon?
What will your sister be doing She will be taking an exam.
then?
What will your friends be doing They will be relaxing.
this summer?
What will your son be doing He will be going to college.
next year?
Where will he be studying? He will be studying at the university.
112 Grammar §11-

§11.6
FUTURE The future perfect tense is used to express action that will
PERFECT be finished at a specific time in the future.

TENSE
Use will have + past participle + by + a specific date
a specific time
a specific event

EXAMPLES
I will have finished my exams by June 1st.
We will have read the reports by ten o’clock.
She will have lost ten pounds by her wedding day.

Use by the time or when + subject + present tense verb +

subject + will have + past participle
EXAMPLES
By the time I see you, I will have graduated.
When I get home, I will have finished my exams.
By the time you read this, I will have left.

§11.7
FUTURE The future perfect progressive expresses action that
PERFECT will have been in progress for a certain length of time at a
specific time in the future.
PROGRESSIVE
TENSE Use subject + will have been + present participle

EXAMPLES
I am going to cook from 8 A.M. until 8 P.M.
You are going to come home at 6 P.M.

At 9:00 A.M., I will be cooking.

At noon, I will still be cooking. I will have been cooking
for four hours.
At 3:00 P.M., I will have been cooking for seven hours.
When you come home at 6:00 P.M., I will have been
cooking for ten hours.
By the time I go to bed, I will have been cooking for
12 hours. After this party, I don’t think I will ever want to
cook again.
 §12.
Verbs—Additional Patterns
§12.1
VERBS USED
AS NOUNS

§12.1-1
The Gerund The gerund form is the present participle (basic verb + ing)
Form used as a subject or a direct object of a sentence, or as an
object of a preposition.

Gerund Gerund Gerund Object

Subject Object of Preposition
Singing is fun. 1 like singing. 1 am fond of singing.

1. Certain verbs are followed by gerund objects:

admit, appreciate, avoid, consider, deny, discuss,
enjoy, finish, imagine, keep, mind, miss, postpone,
quit, recall, resist, risk, stop, suggest, tolerate

EXAMPLES
consider He is considering taking the train.
discuss Did you discuss visiting Canada?
enjoy We enjoy traveling.
finish They are going to finish cleaning
soon.
keep (on) He kept (on) talking to me.
mind Do you mind helping?
postpone We will postpone going.
quit They have quit smoking.
stop It has stopped snowing.

2. Use go + gerund for certain activities:

go boating, bowling, camping, dancing, fishing,
hiking, jogging, running, sailing, shopping,
skating, skiing, swimming

EXAMPLES
Please go bowling with us.
We are going to go camping.
They went fishing last week.

113
114 Grammar §12.

He has never gone sailing before.

They have to go shopping.

3. Use feel like + gerund to express desire to do some-

thing now.
What do you feel like doing? 1 feel like dancing.
What does he feel like doing? He feels like taking a
nap.
What do you all feel like We feel like going
doing? shopping.

4. Use would you mind + gerund to make a very polite

request.
Question Meaning
Would you mind moving over? Please move over.
Would you mind helping me? Please help me.
Would you mind closing the window? Please close the window.

5. Use a gerund after a preposition.

Thank you for helping,
1 did it by working quickly,
She is tired of living there,
1 want to keep on studying,
He is thinking about quitting.

6. Use a gerund after a possessive noun or pronoun.

I love Carolyn’s singing.
He appreciates my being here.
We appreciated his helping us.
They regret your moving so far away.

§12.1-2
The Infinitive The infinitive (to + a basic verb) can be used as a subject or
Form a direct object of a sentence.

Infinitive Subject Infinitive Object

To win the lottery would be fun. They wanted to win the game.

1. Certain verbs are followed by infinitive objects:

afford, agree, appear, beg, claim, decide, expect,
forget, hope, intend, learn, manage, mean, need,
offer, plan, pretend, promise, refuse, seem, try,
wait, want
§12. Verbs—Additional Patterns 115

EXAMPLES
Let’s agree to meet next month.
I’m learning to swim.
He didn’t mean to hurt you.
We need to try harder.
They are offering to help us.

2. Use the infinitive (or in order + infinitive) to tell the

reason for the action:
I went to the store to buy milk. I went to the store in order
to buy milk.
They are studying to get They are studying in order
good grades. to get good grades.

3. Use the infinitive after too + adjective and enough +

adjective.
She is too young to drive.
She is tall enough to drive.
She is not old enough to drive.

4. Use the infinitive after be supposed to mean “expected.”

You are supposed to wear a hat.
It is supposed to rain.

5. Use the infinitive after be glad and be sorry.

I’m glad to meet you.
I was glad to help him.
She will be glad to hear that.
/ am sorry to hear your news.
He was sorry to tell her.

6. Use the infinitive after it takes + an amount of time to

mean the amount of time is necessary.
It takes three hours to drive home.
It took ten minutes to write the letter.

7. Use the infinitive after a verb + noun or direct object

pronoun—see §15.5.
(a) to express a desire for action by another person:
I want Loan to call me.
I want her to call me.
116 Grammar §12.

I want Charles to study more.

I want him to study more.

I don’t want Mom and Dad to know the truth.

I don’t want my parents to know the truth.
I don’t want them to know the truth.
(b) to request action:
Ask Loan to call me.
Ask her to call me.

Tell Charles to study more.

Tell him to study more.

I don’t want to ask my parents to help me.

I don’t want to ask them to help me.

§12.1-3
Gerunds vs. 1. Certain verbs may be followed by either a gerund or an
Infinitives infinitive and have the same meaning.
begin, continue, hate, like, love
EXAMPLES
They began studying last night.
They began to study last night.
We want to continue reading.
We want to continue to read.
She hates washing dishes.
She hates to wash dishes.
He likes going to school.
He likes to go to school.
I love dancing.
I love to dance.

2. After a descriptive adjective (§7.2),

(a) normally, use the infinitive:
It is nice to see you.
It is important to finish early.
It was great to be there.
§12. Verbs—Additional Patterns 117

(b) Informally, you can use it was + descriptive

adjective + gerund when you say good-bye to
someone.
It was nice knowing you.
It was fun working with you.
It was great seeing you.

3. stop
Stop + gerund and stop + infinitive have different meanings.
Statement Meaning
Please stop talking. Don’t talk any more.
Please stop to talk. Stop (what you are doing) and talk
to me.

4. try
Try + gerund and try + infinitive have different meanings.
Try + gerund means “consider as a solution.”
I couldn’t open the door, so I tried using a different key.
He decided to try taking aspirin for his headache.
Try \ infinitive means “make an effort.”
Please try to sleep.
I need to try to practice every day.

5. Used to and be used to

Used to + infinitive expresses past action that is no longer
true.
I used to live in Chicago. I lived in Chicago before;
I don’t live there now.
Be used to + gerund expresses present custom.
I am used to living in I live in Chicago, and I am
Chicago. accustomed to it.
Get used to + gerund expresses adjustment.
I have to get used to waking up at 6:00 A M.
I can’t get used to going to bed before eleven o’clock.

6. Remember and forget

Remember + infinitive = the thought is the cause of the
action.
I remembered to turn off the iron.
Forget + infinitive = the lack of thought causes the lack of
action.
I forgot to turn off the iron.
Remember + gerund = the memory is of the action.
I remember turning off the iron.
118 Grammar §12.

Not forget+ gerund = the memory is of the action.

I will never forget shaking hands with the president!

7. Consider
Consider + direct object + infinitive = believe about
someone or something
I consider him to be very intelligent.
I consider her to be my friend.
Consider + gerund = think about in order to decide
You should consider taking that course.
We are considering going to that play.

8. Imagine
Imagine + direct object + infinitive = possibly believe about
someone or something
I imagine her to be a lot of fun.
I don’t imagine him to be a very good cook.
Imagine + gerund = dream about
I can imagine skiing down those mountains.
I can’t imagine living with him.

9. Come
Come may be followed by a basic verb or an infinitive in the
imperative or the future tenses, with the same meaning.
Come see us. Come to see us.
They will come visit soon. They will come to visit soon.
In other tenses, come is followed by an infinitive.
You came to see us.
They came to visit.
We have come to tell you a secret.

10. Help
Help is followed by a basic verb instead of a gerund or
infinitive.
Please help clean the floor.
I have to help sell tickets.
They helped shovel the snow.
A direct object may be used.
Please help me clean the floor.
I have to help them sell tickets.
They helped us shovel the snow.

11. Make + direct object + basic verb = to force

Have + direct object + basic verb = to arrange
Let + direct object + basic verb = to allow
§12. Verbs—Additional Patterns 119

EXAMPLES Meaning:
She makes him go outside She forces him to go outside.
She has him go outside. She arranges for him to go
outside.
She lets him go outside. She allows him to go outside.

They made her cut her hair. They forced her to cut her
hair.
They had her cut her hair. They arranged for her to cut
her hair.
They let her cut her hair. They allowed her to cut her
hair.

§12.2
QUOTED AND 1. Direct Quotes
REPORTED To repeat someone’s exact words, use quotation marks
before the quote and after the comma, period, question
SPEECH mark, or exclamation point.

EXAMPLES
Bob said, “It’s snowing!”
Mary said, “I’m not going to go to school.”
“I will not shovel snow,” said Mary.
I said, “It snowed yesterday, too.”

If the quote comes first, end the quote with a comma

instead of a period. However, do not change question
marks or exclamation points.
EXAMPLES
“She’s sick,” said Mieko.
“Should we call the doctor?” she asked.
“Let’s go to the hospital!” cried Kim.

If the quote is second, use a comma after the introduction.

EXAMPLES
Mieko said, “She’s sick.”
She asked, “Should we call the doctor?”
Kim cried, “Let’s go to the hospital!”

2. Reported Speech
To tell what someone said, use:

Subject + Past Verb + (that) + Subject + Verb in an

earlier tense
120 Grammar §12.

A present or future statement changes to the past:

Bob said, “It’s snowing.”
Bob said (that) it was snowing.

Bob said, “Mary works hard at school.”

Bob said (that) Mary worked hard at school.

Mary said “I’m not going to go to school.”

Mary said (that) she wasn’t going to go to school.

Mary said “I will not shovel snow.”

Mary said (that) she would not shovel snow.

A past or present perfect tense statement changes to the

past perfect:
I answered, “It snowed yesterday.”
I answered that it had snowed the day before.

Bob said, “Mary worked hard at school.”

Bob said (that) Mary had worked hard at school.

I said, “It has snowed five times this winter.”

I said (that) it had snowed five times this winter.

3. Direct Quotes of Questions

To repeat exactly what someone asked, use quotation marks.
Yes or No Questions:
“Are you going to work?” asked Mary.
“Will you help me?” asked Patsy.
“Have you eaten breakfast?” asked Abu.
Information Questions:
“What are you doing?” asked Bob.
“Why did Judy leave?” I asked.
“Where have they been?” Jane asked.

4. Reported Questions
To tell what someone asked:
Yes or No Questions:

Subject + Verb + if+ Subject + Verb in an earlier tense

Mary asked if I was going to work.

Patsy asked if we would help her.
Abu asked if I had eaten breakfast.
§12. Verbs—Additional Patterns 121

Information Questions:

Subject + Verb + Question Word + Subject + Verb in an

earlier tense

Bob asked what I was doing.

I asked why Judy had left.
Jane asked where they had been.

§12.3
INCLUDED To ask questions within questions, use:
QUESTIONS Question Question
AND Phrase + Word + Subject + Verb + ?
STATEMENTS Do you know
Can you tell me
who that man is?
where the White House is?
Will you find out when they are coming?
Do you know why he did that?

To answer these questions, use:

Answer Question
Phrase + Word + Subject + Verb
1 don’t know who that man is.
1 can’t tell you where the White House is.
1 can’t find out when they are coming.
1 don’t care when they are coming.

When the included question or answer refers to future

action, you can use:

Question Phrase or Answer Phrase +

Question Word + Infinitive

EXAMPLES
Do you know what we Do you know what to do?
should do?
Can you tell me how Can you tell me how to get
I can get there? there?
Will you find out when Will you find out when to
we should arrive? arrive?
Do you know who(m) Do you know who(m) to call?
I can call?
Can you tell her where Can you tell her where to go?
she should go?
122 Grammar §12.

I don’t know what we I don’t know what to do.

should do.
I can’t tell you how you I can’t tell you how to get
can get there. there.
I will find out when we I will find out when to arrive.
should arrive.
I don’t know who(m) you I don’t know who(m) to call.
should call.
I don’t know where I I don’t know where to go.
should go.

§12.4
TAG A tag question is often added to a statement, asking the
QUESTIONS listener to agree with, or confirm the speaker’s statement.
When you want your listener to agree with you
(a) after a positive statement, use a negative tag.

Be

Tag Response of Response of

Statement Question Agreement Disagreement
positive negative
1 am crazy am 1 not? Yes, you are. No, you aren’t.
aren’t 1?
I’m studying
hard, aren’t 1?
You are smart, aren’t you? Yes, 1 am. No, I’m not.
You are
studying, aren’t you?
We are lost, aren’t we? Yes, we are. No, we aren’t.
They are
wonderful, aren’t they? Yes, they are. No, they aren’t.
She is sweet, isn’t she? Yes, she is. No, she isn’t.
He is nice, isn’t he? Yes, he is. No, he isn’t.
It is interesting, isn’t it? Yes, it is. No, it isn’t.

All Other Verbs

Tag Response of Response of

Statement Question Agreement Disagreement
positive negative
1 work hard, don’t 1? Yes, you do. No, you don’t.
You study a lot, don’t you? Yes, 1 do. No, 1 don’t.
We try our best, don’t we? Yes, you do. No, you don’t.
They live here, don’t they? Yes, they do. No, they don’t.
She works hard, doesn’t she? Yes, she does. No, she doesn’t.
He studies a lot, doesn’t he? Yes, he does. No, he doesn’t.
It works, doesn’t it? Yes, it does. No, it doesn’t.
§12. Verbs—Additional Patterns 123

(b) after a negative statement use a positive tag.

Be

Tag Response of Response of

Statement Question Agreement Disagreement
negative positive
I’m not crazy, am 1? No, you aren’t. Yes, you are.
You aren’t late, are you? No, I’m not. Yes, 1 am.
We aren’t ready, are we? No, we aren’t. Yes, we are.
They aren’t
honest, are they? No, they aren’t. Yes, they are.
She isn’t helpful, is she? No, she isn’t. Yes, she is.
He isn’t sorry, is he? No, he isn’t. Yes, he is.

All Other Verbs

Tag Response of Response of
Statement Question Agreement Disagreement
negative positive
1 don’t need that, do 1? No, you don’t. Yes, you do.
You don’t care, do you? No, 1 don’t. Yes, 1 do.
We don’t want
that, do we? No, we don’t. Yes, we do.
They don’t look
good, do they? No, they don’t. Yes, they do.

Follow the same patterns for other tenses.

Tag Response of Response of

Statement Question Agreement Disagreement
negative positive
You were here, weren’t you? Yes, 1 was. No, 1 wasn’t
He smiled at me, didn’t he? Yes, he did. No, he didn’t.
We have been
there, haven’t we? Yes, we have. No, we haven’t.
They had seen
it, hadn’t they? Yes, they had. No, they hadn’t.

Tag Response of Response of

Statement Question Agreement Disagreement
negative positive
You weren’t here, were you? No, 1 wasn’t. Yes, 1 was.
He didn’t smile
at me, did he? No, he didn’t. Yes, he did.
We haven’t been
there, have we? No, we haven’t. Yes, we have.
They hadn’t
seen it, had they? No, they hadn’t. Yes, they had.
124 Grammar §12.

§12.5
USING There are several patterns for sentences that have indirect
VERBS WITH objects—see §6.2-3.

INDIRECT 1. After the verbs bring, give, hand, lend, offer, owe,
OBJECTS pass, pay, sell, send, serve, take, show, read, sing,
teach, tell, write use:

verb + direct + preposition + indirect

object to object
(noun or pronoun)

or

verb + indirect + direct

object object noun
(do not use pronoun)

EXAMPLES
He brings flowers to me. He brings me flowers.
I sold the car to him. I sold him the car.
They have told the truth to us. They have told us the truth.
She is going to serve lamb She is going to serve us
to us. lamb.

Possible: Do Not Use:

He brings them to me. He brings me them.
I sold it to him. I sold him it.
They have told it to us. They have told us it.
She is going to serve it to us. She is going to serve us it.

Use the same patterns with the preposition for after the
verbs bake, buy, build, cook, do, draw, find, get, make,
save.
EXAMPLES
She is baking a cake for him. She is baking him a cake.
He bought a ring for her. He bought her a ring.
They have drawn pictures They have drawn me
for me. pictures.
Please save a seat for me. Please save me a seat.
§12. Verbs—Additional Patterns 125

Possible: Do Not Use:

She is baking it for him. She is baking him it.
He bought it for her. He bought her it
They have drawn them for They have drawn me them.
me.
Please save it for me. Please save me it.

2. After the following verbs, only the first pattern is possible:

with to admit, announce, describe, explain,

introduce, mention, prove, recommend,
repeat, report, say, suggest
with for answer, cash, change, close, open

Do Not Use:
She is describing the She is describing him the
house to him. house.
We explained the lesson to We explained them the
them. lesson.
I mentioned the party to her. I mentioned her the party.
Can you change a twenty for Can you change me a
me? twenty?
Please answer this question Please answer me this
for me. question.

After ask, only the second pattern is possible:

Do Not Use:
May I ask you a question? May I ask a question to
you?
Did you ask him a question? Did you ask a question to
him?
 §13.
Verbs—Special Usage
1. Get + adjective
Use get—to mean “become”—before an adjective.
Commonly used adjectives with get include:

get angry, get mad, get anxious, get nervous, get

excited, get worried
get tall, get big, get old, get fat, get thin, get gray, get bald
get rich, get poor, get busy
get hungry, get thirsty, get cold, get hot
get sleepy, get tired, get sick, get well, get dizzy, get
better, get worse
get late, get dark, get light, get wet, get dry

Other examples:
I get cold in the evenings.
Are you going to get involved?
He gets excited at football games.
Are you getting bored?
It is getting dark.
We got confused without the map.
They got lost, too.
Did you get married?
No, but we got engaged.

2. Have or get something done

To express that somebody else is doing something for you,
use:

have + noun + past participle

or get + noun + past participle

EXAMPLES
Statement Meaning
I have my hair done. Somebody else does my hair.
I get my hair done.
We have our grass cut every Somebody else cuts our grass,
week.
We get our grass cut every
week.

126
§13. Verbs—Special Usage 127

She had her curtains made Somebody else made her curtains,
last year.
She got her curtains made
last year.
He has his oil changed often. Somebody else changes his oil.
He gets his oil changed often.

3. Ask and ask for

ask + indirect object = to direct a question to somebody
Ask Mary if she is sick.
I need to ask her when she is leaving.
Did you ask him who his friend is?
ask for + direct object = to request or order something
Ask for a hamburger with onions.
I need to ask for more money.
Did you ask for help?

4. Borrow and lend

borrow = to receive a loan
May I please borrow a Yes, you may borrow it.
dollar (from you)?

lend = to give a loan

Will you lend me a dollar? Yes, I will you lend you
a dollar.

5. Speak and talk

speak = use a language
give a serious message
give a public speech
He doesn’t speak Russian.
The teacher spoke to me about my son’s behavior.
The president is going to speak on television.

talk = to converse
I hope we can talk soon.
She talks to her mother on the phone every day.

6. Go and come, take and bring

go = movement to a place where neither the speaker nor
listener is
Please go to the store.
I’m going to Janet’s house.
My friends went home.
128 Grammar §13.

come = movement to where the listener is

I want to come see you.
I am coming to your house tomorrow.
We came to your party last week.
Is your family going to come to visit?

come = movement to where the speaker is

Please come see me.
Are you coming to my house tomorrow?
You came to my party, didn’t you?
I wish my family could come to visit.

take and bring = to have with you

Use take with go.
Go home and take your things.
We’re going to Janet’s party, and we’re taking a gift.
He went to school and took his lunch.
Use bring with come.
I’m coming to your house, and I’m bringing a pizza.
Did your husband come home from his trip? What did
he bring you?
I hope your children came home from school, and
brought their books.

Come home, dear daughter, and bring your things.

If you come to my party, will you bring some cookies?
Betty came over and brought her new boyfriend.

7. Say and tell

say = put into words
Do not use an indirect object with say. Use to + direct object.
Please say what you think. Please say to me what you
think.
What did your friend say? What did he say to you?
He said he wanted to go home. He said to me that he
wanted to go home.

tell + indirect object

(a) to put into words:
Please tell me what you think.
What did your friend tell you?
He told me he wanted to go home.
(b) to relate a story or event:
He told us the story of his life.
Please tell me what happened.
§13. Verbs—Special Usage 129

(c) to inform:
He is going to tell the police.
I hope nobody tells her parents.
She told him her secret.
(d) with the truth:
Always tell the truth.

8. Do and make
do = to act or perform
Use do before nouns that imply “work” or “effort.”
do work
do exercises
do homework
do housework
do laundry
do dishes

make = to create, fabricate, or build

make a cake, pie, sandwich
make a dress, suit
make a paper airplane

ver = t0
make + direct object ^ f°rce somebody or
something to do sorm "
Don’t make me go?
He made her do thaf
You can’t make them study.

Use make in many special expressions. For example:

Meaning
make a bed arrange the bedding
make a mess spoil
make an appointment arrange a meeting
make arrangements plan
make a mistake err
make a fuss complain
make money earn money

9. Hope and wish

Hope expresses a desire for something possible.
Present desire for future:
I hope he wins, or I hope he will win.
I hope I get a promotion, or I hope I will get a
promotion.
130 Grammar §13.

Present desire when past action is unknown:

I hope he won.
I hope I got a promotion.
Past desire about past:
I hoped he would win.
I hoped I would get a promotion.

Wish expresses a desire for an opposite situation.

Statement Meaning
Present
1 wish he were here. 1 am sorry that he isn’t here.
He wishes 1 lived there. He is sorry that 1 don’t live there.
Past
1 wish he had been here. 1 am sorry that he wasn’t here.
She wishes we had had a car. She is sorry that we didn’t have a car
Future
1 wish 1 could travel. 1 am sorry that 1 won’t be able to
travel.
She wishes she could go home. She is sorry that she can’t go home.

10. Watch and look at

You watch something that moves, and look at something
that is still.
He watches TV a lot.
They are watching a baseball game.
She looks at magazines.
She is looking at some photographs.

Watch can mean “to take care of.”

Her sister is watching the baby.

11. Look, look alike, and look like

look + adjective = to seem
She looks tired.
He looks unhappy.
They don’t look interested.
alike = the same
They are alike. They are the same.
They look alike. They seem the same physically.
look like + noun = to be similar to, to resemble
She looks like her mother. They look alike.
He doesn’t look like his brother. They don’t look alike.
They look like movie stars.
§13. Verbs—Special Usage 131

It + looks like + subject + verb = to be apparent

It looks like she is tired.
It looks like he is unhappy.
It looks like they are not interested.
It + looks like + subject + future verb = a prediction
It looks like it is going to rain.
It looks like they’re going to get married.
It looks like he will win.

12. Belong to has two meanings:

(a) be a part of, or a member of something:
I belong to the Garden Club.
She belongs to the Rock Spring Church.
(b) be owned by someone:
That book belongs to me.
Those dogs belong to our neighbors.

13. Depend on has two meanings:

(a) expect support from someone:
They depend on their parents for everything.
(b) based on:
Whether we go on a picnic depends on the weather.
It depends on the weather.
§14.
Verbs—Passive Voice
The verb tenses outlined in the previous sections have
been in the active voice. They give importance to the
person who does the action. The person is the subject of
the sentence.
EXAMPLES
My husband painted the house.
Thomas Edison invented the light bulb.
Shakespeare wrote Twelfth Night.
Jeremy loves me.

The passive voice is used to shift the emphasis from

subject to object. The person who does the action is not the
important focus of the sentence.

To form the passive voice, use a form of be + a past

participle.
Present Tense 1 am misunderstood.
Modals 1 can be misunderstood.
Present Progressive 1 am being misunderstood.
Future 1 am going to be misunderstood.
1 will be misunderstood.
Present Perfect 1 have been misunderstood.
Past 1 was misunderstood.
1 used to be misunderstood.
Past Progressive 1 was being misunderstood.
Past Perfect 1 had been misunderstood.

To use the passive voice with a modal auxiliary, use the

modal + be + past participle.
Present 1 can be misunderstood.
Future 1 could be misunderstood.
Past 1 could have been misunderstood.
Present 1 may be misunderstood.
Future 1 might be misunderstood.
Past 1 might have been misunderstood.
Present/Future He must be understood.
He has to be understood.
Past He had to be understood.

132
§14. Verbs—Passive Voice 133

Passive voice sentences give importance to the thing or

person that receives the action. The receiver of the action is
now the subject of the sentence.
EXAMPLES
The house was painted (last month).
The light bulb was invented (a long time ago).
Twelfth Night was written (in Old English).
/am loved (and I am happy).

The passive voice allows the speaker to avoid identifying

the “doer” of the action.
EXAMPLES
She is spoiled. (“Somebody” spoils her.)
She is being punished. (“Somebody” is punishing
her.)
I am going to be promoted. (“Somebody” is going to
promote me.)
We will be helped. (“Somebody” will help us.)
We have been robbed! (“Somebody” robbed us.)
He was told the truth. (“Somebody” told him the
truth.)
He was being helped. (“Somebody” was helping
him.)
They have been sent away. (“Somebody” has sent them
away.)
 §15.
Verbs—Imperative Mood

§15.1
INSTRUCTIONS, To give instructions, suggestions, or commands, use the
SUGGESTIONS, imperative mood. To make the imperative, use a basic verb
with no subiect
OR COMMANDS
Use please before the verb or at the end of the phrase.
Please come here!
Come here, please\

Please write soon.

Sign your name, please.

To make a negative suggestion or command, use

don’t + basic verb.
Please don’t come back!
Don’t come back, please!
Please don’t drive fast.
Don’t be late.
Don’t forget to call me.
EXAMPLES

Giving Directions
To get to my house,
Get on Route 66, going west.
Take Exit 67 E.
Go straight for three miles.
Turn right on Spring Street.
Pass three traffic lights.
Turn left at the fourth light, onto Maple Avenue.
Look for my house on the right. It is the red brick
colonial with the dogwood tree in front.
Don’t park on the street.
Turn into my driveway, and park there.

134
§15. Verbs—Imperative Mood 135

Giving Instructions
To use the microwave,
Put the food on a paper, plastic, or glass plate.
Do not use a plate with any metal parts.
Cover the food loosely with a paper towel.
Pull the door open.
Put the plate in the center of the oven.
Close the oven door.
Press the timer button.
Indicate the number of minutes needed for the dish.
Press the start button.
Wait the required time.
Listen for the beep.
Pull the door open, and remove your warmed food.

§15.1-1
Suggestions To make suggestions that include the speaker, use
That Include let’s (not) + basic verb.

the Speaker EXAMPLES

Please let’s go home. Let’s not stay late, please\
Let’s go home, please! Let’s not argue.
Let’s eat out. Let’s not spend too much
money.

§15.1-2
More Formal To make more formal suggestions that include the speaker,
Suggestions use Shall we + basic verb + ?

Shall we dance?
Shall we eat at 8 o’clock?

§15.2
YOU TO To ask for or give instructions in conversation, use the
MEAN pronoun you to mean “anybody”—see §6.1-1.

“ANYBODY” Question Answer

How do you start the machine? You push the button.
How do you get to the airport from You cross the bridge and go straight
here? ahead.
136 Grammar §15.

§15.3
INDIRECT If you want another person to do something, instead of a
COMMANDS command you can use: want+ name of person (or direct
object pronoun) + infinitive—see §12.1-2.
EXAMPLES
I want Liz to call me. I want her to call me.
They want Barry to go They want him to go home.
home.
She wants Helena to stay She wants her to stay a little
a little longer. longer.
He wants his friends to He wants them to lend him the
lend him the money. money.
We wanted Max to finish We wanted him to finish
college. college.
Do you want me to help Yes, I want you to help me.
you?
 §16.
Verbs—Subjunctive Mood
The subjunctive mood is used
• after certain verbs that express suggestions or demands
for future actions.
• after certain expressions that indicate necessity.
• after wish, and after //to express untrue situations.

§16.1
PRESENT Use the basic verb for all persons to form the present
SUBJUNCTIVE subjunctive

1. Be
Singular Plural
i be we be
you be you be
he be they be
she be
it be

2. All Other Verbs

Singular Plural
i work we work
you work you work
he work they work
she work
it work

EXAMPLES
I suggest that you I suggested that you be quiet.
be quiet.
He recommends that we He will recommend that we
be on time. be on time.
She asks that they be She asked that they be
responsible. responsible.
We demand that you be We will demand that you be
honest. honest.

137
138 Grammar §16.

They insist that we be They are insisting that we be

patient. patient.
It is necessary that you It was necessary that you be
be careful. careful.
It is important that I be It has been important that I
strong. be strong.

We suggest that he study We suggested that he study

more. more.
They recommend that we She recommended that we
try again. try again.
She asks that he return She has asked that he return
next week. next week.
It is necessary that he It was necessary that he
come home. come home.
It is important that she It was important that she
bring the paper tomorrow. bring the paper tomorrow.

§16.2
PAST Regular past subjunctive forms are the same as
SUBJUNCTIVE indicative past tense forms:

worked played had did went thought

There is one irregular form:

the verb be used with I, he, she, and it is were, not was.

EXAMPLES
I wish I were If I were
I wish he were If he were
She wishes she were If she were
We wish it were If it were

1. Use the past subjunctive after wish to express regret

that something is not true.
Regret Subjunctive Sentence
I regret that I am not thin. I wish I were thin.
He regrets that she is not here. He wishes she were here.
She regrets that Kathy does not She wishes Kathy lived nearer.
live nearer.
We regret that we do not have We wish we had a car.
a car.
They regret that John doesn’t They wish John worked harder.
work harder.
§16 Verbs—Subjunctive Mood 139

2. Use the past subjunctive after if to express your

probable reaction to an untrue situation.

If + subject + subjunctive + subject + would + basic verb

If I wanted that dress, I would buy it.

Meaning: I don’t want that dress, and I am not going to buy it.

If I were you, I would call her.

Meaning: I think you should call her.

If you worked here, you would understand.

Meaning: You do not understand because you do not work
here.

§16.3
PERFECT Perfect subjunctive forms are the same as indicative past
SUBJUNCTIVE Perfect forms
1. Use the perfect subjunctive after wish to express regret
that something was not true in the past.
Regret Subjunctive Sentence
I regret that I was not thin in my I wish I had been thin in my youth.
youth.
He regrets that she was not here He wishes she had been here last
last night. night.
She regrets that Kathy didn’t stay She wishes Kathy had stayed with
with her when she was sick. her when she was sick.
We regret that we did not have a We wish we had had a car when we
car when we were in Los Angeles. were in Los Angeles.
They regret that John didn’t work They wish John had worked harder.
harder.

2. Use the perfect subjunctive after if to express your prob-

able reaction to a past untrue situation.

If + subject + past subjunctive + subject + would + present

perfect verb

If I had wanted that dress, I would have bought it.

Meaning: I didn’t buy that dress because I didn’t want it.

If I had been you, I would have called her.

Meaning: I think you should have called her.
140 Grammar §16.

If you had worked here, would have

you
understood.
Meaning: You didn’t understand because you did not work
here.

§16.4
SUBJUNCTIVE 1. Use the indicative after if to predict:
VS. INDICATIVE (a) possible action and certain result.
AFTER IF If + subject + present verb, (then) subject + present verb

If I eat too much, I get sick.

Meaning: Every time I eat too much, I get sick.

If he is tired, he is grouchy.
Meaning: Whenever he is tired, he is grouchy.
(b) probable action and certain result.
If+ subject + present verb, (then) subject + future verb

If I work tomorrow, the boss will be happy.

Meaning: I expect to work; there is more than a 50 percent
possibility that I will work.

If we go to South America, we will go to Bolivia.

Meaning: We expect to go to South America; there is more
than a 50 percent possibility.

2. Use the subjunctive after if .

(a) to indicate improbable action and conditional result.
If + subject + subjunctive, (then) subject + would + basic verb

If I worked tomorrow, the boss would be happy.

Meaning: I don’t expect to work; there is less than a 50 per-
cent possibility.

If we went to South America, we would go to Bolivia.

Meaning: We don’t expect to go to South America; there is
less than a 50 percent possibility.
(b) to very politely ask permission to do something.
Would + subject + mind + if+ subject + subjunctive

Would you mind if I opened the window?

Meaning: May I please open the window?

Would Mr. Smith mind if we borrowed his ladder?

Meaning: May we borrow Mr. Smith’s ladder?
 §17.
Prepositions
A preposition is a word that relates its noun or pronoun
object with another word in a sentence.

A preposition + (article) + noun or object pronoun =

a prepositional phrase

for the people

for them

§17.1
PREPOSITIONS over The white box is over the black box.
above The white box is above the black box.
THAT INDICATE below The black box is below the white box
PLACE beneath The black box is beneath the white
box
under The black box is under the white box.
underneath The black box is underneath the
white box.

behind Chair A is behind chair B.

in back of Chair A is in back of chair B.
n n n
ABC in front of Chair B is in front of chair A.
ahead of Chair B is ahead of chair A.
across from Chair C is across from chair B.
opposite Chair C is opposite chair B.

Chair A is against chair B.

mFi
A B C
against
by Chair B is by chair C.
beside Chair B is beside chair C.
next to Chair B is next to chair C.

'FlFl'Pl
1 2 3 between Chair 2 is between chair 1 and chair 3.

ooooooooooo
000000*0000
ooooooooooo among The black spot is among the white spots.
ooooooooooo

141
142 Grammar
§17

near Chair A is near chair B.

close to Chair A is close to chair B.
far from Chair C is far from chair B.
A B C D beyond Chair D is beyond chair C.

on The white lamp is on the table.

$ A
Rf
B
upon
off
The white lamp is upon the table.
The black lamp is off the table.

in Apple A is in the box.

inside Apple A is inside the box.
A
within Apple A is within the box.
out of Apple B is out of the box.
outside of Apple B is outside of the box.

Use in, on, and at with addresses and geographical

locations.
a continent, a country, a state, a city,
a town, an inside corner
in South America
in Ecuador
in Quito
on a coast, a beach, a side, a street, a
floor, an outside corner
on the Atlantic coast
on the south side
on Maple Avenue
on the 10th floor
a building (inside, outside, or near),
a number
at the market
at my friend’s house
at home
at 2345 Maple Avenue
a specific place inside a building
in her office
in the kitchen
in the corner
§17. Prepositions 143

§17.2
PREPOSITIONS
THAT INDICATE
DIRECTION

across The line goes across the box.

along The line goes along the box.

by The line goes by the box.

past The line goes past the box.

through The line goes through the box.

around The line goes around the box.

down The black line goes down the hill.

up The red line goes up the hill.

to The black line goes to the box.

toward The dotted line is going toward
the box.
from The red line goes from the box.

back to The black line goes back to the box.

into The black line goes into the box.

out of The red line goes out of the box.
144 Grammar
§17

onto The black line goes onto the table,

off The red line goes off the table.

§17.3
PREPOSITIONS The team practiced
THAT INDICATE before the game.
TIME They celebrated after
the game.

during a limited period The spectators cheered

during the game.

since from then until now She hasn’t eaten since

last night.

until, up to between now and 1 will stay until noon.

a time

around, an approximate We will be there around

about time 9:30.

by no later than a time Please call me by four

o’clock.

for a length of time She waited for

30 minutes.

through past a time or He slept through the

an event game.

Use in, on, and af with certain time expressions.

a century, a decade, a year, a season, a month, a
period of the day
in the 1800s
in the 1950s
in 1991
in the spring
in February
in the morning
in the afternoon
in the evening
§17- Prepositions 145

in time not too late

He arrived in time to see the whole show.

on a day, a date, a holiday, certain days

on Monday
on the 15th
on St. Patrick’s Day
on her birthday
on weekends

on time at the expected time

Mary is always on time for class.

night, a specific time

at night
at 4 o’clock
at midnight
at noon

at present now
At present we are studying grammar.

at the moment now

I am busy at the moment.

§17.4
PREPOSITIONS by forms of communication He sent the memo
(mail, phone, fax) by fax.
THAT INDICATE forms of transportation They went to town by bus.
OTHER (car, bus, train, plane, boat)
RELATIONSHIPS people who do things The dress was made by
my mother.
The song was recorded by
Elvis Presley.
methods She made it by hand and by
machine.

with tools and instruments He fixed the shelf with a

hammer.
I opened the door with my
key.

types of composition
(ink, pencil, color) She wrote the letter in ink.
146 Grammar §17.

of materials (wool, glass, The table is made of glass.

metal), belonging He is a friend of mine.
Quito is the capital of
Ecuador.
from places The bowl is from India.
people The present is from Lynn.
with including other people I went with Stephen.
including things I went with my suitcase.
without not including other people They left without me.
not including things He is without money.
by one’s without another person She made the cake by
se
lf herself.
instead including one person or Bill came instead of Bob.
of thing, but not another

except including some things or Everybody was happy

people, but not particular except Kathy,
ones
as in the role of She works as a secretary.
for purposes We marched for peace.
He had potatoes for dinner.
beneficiaries The gift is for you.
destinations I left for Mexico.

§17.5
ASKING When the object of the preposition answers a question, the
QUESTIONS pattern for the question is:
WITH Be or
PREPOSITIONS Question Auxiliary
Word + Verb + Subject + Verb + Preposition
Where are you from?
Who are they with?
What are you thinking about?
Who does he work for?
Whom did they talk to?
Who is she going with?
What are you waiting for?
What did he do that for?
Who do you sit next to?
Which street do you live on?
What city were you born in?
§17. Prepositions 147

§17.6
PREPOSITIONS Prepositions are often unpredictable. Learn these
COMBINED combinations as whole units.

WITH NOUNS, EXAMPLES

(a) Preposition + (article) + noun combinations
ADJECTIVES,
in
ANDVERBS
in English, in Spanish, The letter is in English.
in Arabic
in the rain, in good Let’s walk in the rain.
weather, in bad weather
in a good mood, in a bad Mark is always in a good
mood mood.
in style Flat shoes are in style this
season.
in good / bad shape, in good Your mother is in good
condition, in good health health.
in a hurry Let’s go. We are in a hurry.
in charge You’re the boss; you’re in
charge.
in a car, a small boat, a He’s going in the car.
small plane, a helicopter
(vehicles in which you
cannot walk around)
in a book, in a newspaper, I read that story in a
in a magazine magazine.
in a low voice, in a whisper, She speaks in a low,
in a loud voice mysterious voice.
in a suit, in blue jeans, in He arrived in blue jeans and
high heels a red shirt.
on
on a bus, a train, a large They’re riding on the bus.
plane, a ship (vehicles in
which you can walk around)
on a bicycle, motorcycle, We came on the
skates motorcycle.
on foot (walking) I went on foot.
on fire Look out! The pan is on fire!
on television, on the radio He’s going to be on
television today.
I heard the news on the
radio.
on paper Please write it down on
paper.
148 Grammar
§17.

on a nice day I always take a walk on a

nice day.
on strike They didn’t get their benefits,
so they went on strike.
at
at home I’ve been at home all day.
at school The children are at school
now.
at work I left my papers at work.

by chance We met by chance.

with
with luck With luck, we will meet again,

(b) Adjective + preposition combinations

about

angry about (a thing) I am angry about the strike.

anxious about They are anxious about her
poor health.
concerned about We are concerned about
your grades.
crazy about I am crazy about my new
dress.
excited about She is excited about her
date.
happy about We are all happy about the
good news.
honest about He is honest about his
motives.
nervous about They are really nervous
about the exam.
sad about She is so sad about her
father’s death.
sorry about I am sorry about not calling
you.
worried about The mothers are all worried
about their children.
§17. Prepositions 149

amazed at I am amazed at the news of

your wedding.
amused at She was amused at the idea.
angry at (a person) Everybody was angry at the
teacher.
annoyed at The teacher was annoyed at
me.
good at (skilled) Mary is good at tennis.
mad at (a person) Now they are mad at me.
surprised at I’m surprised at you. I didn’t
think you would do that!

[by

amazed by She was amazed by the

events.
amused by The children were amused
by the clown.
annoyed by I can’t help being annoyed
by the traffic.
bewildered by We are bewildered by their
silence.
bored by He was so bored by his
father’s jokes.
confused by I am confused by so many
rules.
disgusted by The teachers were disgusted
by the children’s behavior.
embarrassed by She was embarrassed by
her brother’s bad manners.
fascinated by He was fascinated by her
beautiful manners.
frustrated by They are frustrated by so
many delays.
irritated by Are you irritated by the noise?
shocked by We were shocked by their
foul language.

for

bad for (destructive) Too much fat is bad for your

health.
difficult for It is difficult for me to hear
you.
eager for We are eager for our vacation.
150 Grammar §17.

easy for It is easy for her to stand on

her head.
good for (beneficial) Walking is good for you.
grateful for (a thing) She is so grateful for your
help.
hard for It is hard for us to understand
you.
hungry for I am hungry for a steak and
french fries.
known for She is known for her dirty
tricks.
prepared for We are not prepared for the
exam.
qualified for He is very well qualified for
that job.
ready for She is ready for her
performance.
remembered for She will be remembered for
her kindness.
responsible for (a thing) You are responsible for
buying the food.
sorry for I am sorry for disturbing you.
suitable for Those casual clothes are not
suitable for the office.
thirsty for Are you thirsty for a soda?
I am!

from

absent from She was absent from class

today.
different from Your shoes are different
from mine.
divorced from Her mom is divorced from
her dad.
exhausted from They were exhausted from
working.
gone from They have been gone from
here for weeks.
safe from At home he feels safe from
all harm.

in

disappointed in Her mother was

disappointed in her.
§17. Prepositions 151

interested in They are interested in the

history of the city.
involved in He is involved in that situation.
dressed in She arrived dressed in an
evening gown.

of

afraid of No wonder she is afraid of

mice.
ashamed of His family is ashamed of his
problems.
aware of We were not aware of the
problem.
capable of She is capable of doing
better work.
composed of The ocean is composed of
salt water.
convinced of I am convinced of his
innocence.
envious of She is so envious of my
friend.
fond of He is very fond of her.
frightened of Are you frightened of
animals?
full of This glass is full of cider.
guilty of They found him guilty of the
crime.
in charge of We are in charge of the
party arrangements.
in favor of He is in favor of the new law.
in danger of You are in danger of being
robbed.
innocent of She is innocent of any
wrongdoing.
jealous of You are just jealous of her.
kind of It was so kind of you to
help us.
made of This bread is made of all
natural ingredients.
proud of I am very proud of you for
graduating.
rid of They got rid of that old car.
scared of He is scared of heights.
sure of Are you absolutely sure of
that?
152 Grammar §17.

terrified of My friend is terrified of fire.

tired of We are tired of playing
games.

on

dependent on She is completely

dependent on her father.

to

accustomed to We are not accustomed to

driving in traffic.
addicted to Unfortunately, he is addicted
to drugs.
bad to (a person); abusive They are bad to their mother.
clear to It is clear to everyone that
you are lying.
committed to We are committed to
finishing on time.
compared to Compared to her, you are
lucky!
connected to This street is not connected
to that street.
courteous to You should be courteous to
others.
dedicated to He is dedicated to his boss.
devoted to She is devoted to her job,
too.
engaged to Her brother is engaged to
my sister.
equal to Her act is equal to treason.
exposed to At the beach you are
exposed to the sun.
faithful to She is faithful to her
husband.
friendly to They are friendly to all
newcomers.
good to (a person); caring Those children are very
good to their mother.
grateful to (a person) She is grateful to them for
their kindness.
inferior to These products are inferior
to the old ones.
kind to He is always kind to
strangers.
§17. Prepositions 153

limited to With that license, you are

limited to driving during the
day; you cannot drive at
night.
married to She was married to him
once.
nice to Thank you for being nice to
me.
opposed to Our senator is opposed to
that proposal.
polite to Your son is always polite to
me.
related to How are you related to him?
Is he your cousin?
relevant to Please speak later; your
ideas are not relevant to
our discussion.
responsible to (a person) I am responsible to the
department chairman.
similar to Your new car is similar to
mine.
superior to His new car was more
expensive than yours, but it
isn’t superior to yours.

with

acquainted with Are you acquainted with

your classmates?
annoyed with I think my friend is annoyed
with me.
associated with He is associated with a new
company.
blessed with You are blessed with many
talents.
bored with They seem to be bored with
school.
careless with Don’t be careless with your
ATM card.
cluttered with The floor was cluttered with
dirty clothes.
content with I am really content with my
situation.
coordinated with Our program is coordinated
with yours.
154 Grammar §17.

crowded with The airport is crowded with

stranded travelers.
disappointed with He was disappointed with
the teachers.
disgusted with I am disgusted with this
dirty place.
equipped with The car is equipped with
power steering.
familiar with Are you familiar with this
computer?
fascinated with The baby is fascinated with
his new toy.
filled with The tank is filled with gas.
finished with We are finally finished with
the painting.
friendly with He is friendly with all the
newcomers.
furnished with The apartments are
furnished with extra beds.
honest with Thank you for being honest
with me.
irritated with The players are irritated
with their coach for making
them practice so much.
patient with The nurses were very
patient with us.
pleased with I am pleased with the
results of the test.
satisfied with They were not satisfied with
the outcome.
upset with The coach was upset with
the referee.

(c) Verb + preposition combinations

about

argue about They argued about the new

rule all night.
ask about She was asking about the
homework.
complain about He complains about his
chores.
dream about I dream about you every
night.
§17. Prepositions 155

forget about Don’t forget about the party

you promised.
know about We don’t know anything
about this place.
laugh about You will laugh about this
later on.
talk about Don’t talk about me when
I’m not here.
tell about They told us about your
accident.
think about Who are you thinking
about?
They are thinking about
moving.
worry about Try not to worry about this
problem.

arrive at (a building) She will arrive at the airport

at 6:10.
laugh at (ridicule) Please don’t laugh at me
when you see my haircut.
stare at The child stared at the
strange-looking man.
succeed at To succeed at this job, you
need to work hard.

for

apologize for She apologized for being

late.
blame for She blamed him for
upsetting her.
care for He cares for her a lot.
excuse for Please excuse me for
interrupting.
fight for Sometimes you have to fight
for your rights.
forgive for He forgave her for telling a
lie.
hope for We are hoping for better
weather.
pay for You can pay for that at the
cash register.
pray for He prayed for peace.
156 Grammar §17.

substitute for Ms. Smith is substituting for

the teacher today.
thank for I want to thank you for all
your help.
vote for Please don’t vote for him!

from

borrow from She borrowed the sweater

from Sally.
distinguish from I can’t distinguish X from Y
on the chart.
escape from They managed to escape
from the building.
graduate from When are you going to
graduate from college?
hear from (get news) I got a letter today. I finally
heard from him.
hide from She is trying to hide from
her old boyfriend.
prevent from She can’t prevent him from
calling her.
prohibit from The law prohibits you from
parking here.
protect from The cream will protect you
from sunburn.
recover from She is recovering from the
flu.
rescue from He rescued her from the
burning building.
rest from You need to rest from
studying so much.
separate from Try to separate the yolks
from the whites.
stop from You can’t stop them from
trying.
subtract from To get the balance, subtract
the debits from the credits.

arrive in (a city, a country) When did you arrive in this

country?
believe in Do you believe in love at
first sight?
§17. Prepositions 157

excel in Your son excels in

mathematics.
participate in I hope you will participate in
this activity.
succeed in I hope he succeeds in
getting them to come.

of

accuse of They accused us of stealing

the money.
approve of Her mother doesn’t approve
of her friends.
consist of This mixture consists of
flour and water.
dream of They are dreaming of better
times.
take advantage of Try to take advantage of this
opportunity.
Don’t let other people take
advantage of you.
take care of She takes care of her sick
aunt.
If your faucet leaks, the
plumber will take care of it.

on

concentrate on I can’t concentrate on my

lesson.
count on I know I can count on my
friends.
decide on They can’t decide on a date
for the wedding.
depend on My friends depend on me,
too.
insist on He insisted on staying here.
plan on When do you plan on
coming?
rely on I was sure I could rely on
you to help me.

to

add to Now add water to this

mixture.
158 Grammar §17.

admit to He admitted to being late

three times.
apologize to (a person) She had to apologize to the
whole family.
apply to (a place) I am applying to the state
university.
belong to Do you belong to a club?
Does this car belong to
you?
compare to Compare your schedule to
mine.
complain to (a person) Don’t complain to me;
complain to the boss.
contribute to Your ideas contribute to the
solution.
lend to Will you lend some money
to her?
listen to She listens to the radio in
the car.
look forward to We look forward to seeing
you in October.
object to He objected to her attitude.
respond to I hope he responds to my
letter.
subscribe to Which magazines do you
subscribe to?
talk to (a person) I need to talk to you today.

with

agree with I don’t agree with you about

that.
argue with They argue with each other
all the time.
compare with You can’t compare apples
with oranges.
cover with Be sure to cover the food
with plastic wrap.
disagree with She disagrees with all his
ideas.
discuss with Can we discuss our plan
with you?
help with I need help with the
cleaning.
provide with The hotel provides you with
room service.
§17. Prepositions 159

§17.7
PREPOSITIONS A preposition can follow a verb and change its meaning.
FOLLOWING
VERBS

§17.7-1
Intransitive Some verb-preposition combinations are intransitive; they
have no ob ect
Verb-Preposition i
Combinations EXAMPLES

Verb + Preposition Meaning Sample Sentence

get along live in harmony She gets along with her
roommates.
get around be knowledgeable Teenagers really get
around.
hang around do nothing Sometimes they just hang
around.
get away escape Please help me get away.
pass away die His father passed away
last night.
drop by visit without My sister dropped by this
notice afternoon.
check in register We have to check in at the
hotel.
drop in visit Will you drop in later?
get in enter Please unlock the door; 1
can’t get in.
turn in go to bed It’s time to turn in.
drop off fall asleep 1 dropped off when 1 was
reading.
take off leave/not go to What time does the
work plane take off?
I’m going to take off
tomorrow.
drop out stop attending It’s too bad he dropped
school out.
check out end a hotel stay We have to check out
before noon.
find out discover the Try to find out where
answer she lives.
get out leave a session They get out at three.
keep out not enter You’re not welcome; keep
out.
look out be careful Look out! A car is coming!
pass out lose She passed out in the hall.
consciousness
try out audition The auditions are tomorrow;
are you going to try out?
160 Grammar §17.

turn out end How did the auditions turn

out?
watch out be careful This is a dangerous corner;
you have to watch out.
start over begin again 1 made a mistake; 1 want to
start over.
take over become boss Don’t invite him; he always
takes over.
cheer up be happier 1 sure hope he cheers up.
get up arise/stand What time do you get up?
give up stop trying/ Keep trying; never give
surrender up.
grow up become an adult Where did you grow up?
keep up achieve the same It is hard to keep up when
as others you have two jobs.
make up stop fighting I’m glad they finally made
up.
show up appear What time did he show
unexpectedly up?
throw up vomit The sick child threw up at
school.
turn up appear Look who just turned up!
unexpectedly
wake up stop sleeping 1 woke up three times last
night.
get through finish/make When are you going to get
contact through?
I’m calling, but 1 can’t get
through.

§17.7-2
Transitive Transitive verb-preposition combinations have an
Verb- object. These combinations are either separable or
non-separable
Preposition
Combinations
§17.7-2.1 SEPARABLE VERB-PREPOSITION
COMBINATION

With separable combinations

• if the object is a pronoun, it must separate the verb and
the preposition.
• if the object is a noun, it may be placed either before or
after the preposition.

Patterns:
Subject Verb Noun Object Preposition
He put the hammer down.
§17. Prepositions 161

Subject Verb Pronoun Object Preposition

He put it down.
Subject Verb Preposition Noun Object
He put down the hammer.

Do Not Use:
Subject Verb Preposition Pronoun Object
He put down it.

EXAMPLES
Verb + Object + Preposition Meaning
bring it about make it happen We are trying to bring about
a solution.

name him after give him the name of They named the baby after
me.

put it away store it Please put the picture away.

throw it away put it in the trash Please throw that ball away.

call me back telephone me again Call me back at eight.

get it back receive it again 1 hope 1 get my book back.
give it back return it She will have to give it back.
pay him back return the money We will pay him back soon.
put it back return it to its place Please put that chair back
where it was.

cut it down make it smaller The report is too long; cut it

down.
put it down release it That’s my money; put it
down.
put her down criticize her He always puts her down.
tear it down destroy it They tore that building down.
turn it down refuse an offer/ She turned down the job offer.
reduce the volume 1 had to turn my radio down.
turn him down refuse his request He wanted to marry her; she
turned him down.
write it down note it on paper Write down my phone
number.

fill it in complete it You have to fill in this form.

hand it in give it to the leader Students, hand in your
papers!
turn it in give it to the leader 1 forgot to turn in my paper.

bring it on cause it The weather brought on my

cold.
have it on be wearing it She has on a new sweater.
keep it on continue wearing Be sure to keep your ring on.
put it on begin wearing 1 can’t wait to put my new
dress on.
put me on tell me a lie He says he’s a lawyer; 1 think
he’s putting me on.
 162 Grammar
§17.

Verb + Object + Preposition Meaning

try it on put it on to test it Did you try it on at the store?
turn it on make it begin functioning Turn on the TV.
call it off cancel it We called off the wedding.
drop it off leave it Drop the package off tonight.
put it off postpone it They put the picnic off until
Friday.
put him off repel him That perfume really put him
off.
shut it off make it stop functioning Please shut off the alarm
clock!
take it off remove it Can you take the pan off the
stove?
tear it off remove it quickly He tore off his shirt and
made a bandage.
turn it off make it stop functioning She was glad to turn off the
computer.

ask you out invite you He wants to ask you out.

check it out inspect it My heater isn’t working. Will
you check it out?
cut it out stop doing it That habit is so annoying;
please cut it out.
remove it with scissors 1 cut out the article about
you.
cross it out delete it Please cross out the
mistake.
figure it out solve it 1 can’t figure out the riddle.
figure her out understand her They will never figure her
out.
fill it out complete it Please fill out this form.
find him out discover his secret Do you think they will find
him out?
get it out remove it Can you get this splinter out?
hand them out give them to a group The teacher handed the
papers out to the class.
kick them out make them leave The principal kicked them
out.
leave it out not include it Please leave
that part out.
pass it out distribute it Can you pass this
information out?
pick it out choose it My boyfriend picked it out.
point it out indicate it She pointed out her house
on the way.
put it out extinguish it He was able to put out the
fire.
put us out make us leave/ She put us out at midnight.
annoy us That really put us out.
take it out remove it from within Take the key out.
take her out escort her She wants you to take her
out.
§17. Prepositions 163

Verb + Object + Preposition Meaning

tear it out remove it quickly He tore the paper out of his
notebook.
throw it out put it in the trash I’m glad you threw that T-shirt
out.
try it out use it as a test Let’s try this bike out.
turn it out make a light stop I’m sleepy; turn out the
functioning light.

do it over repeat it 1 had to do the test over.

look it over check it Will you look it over for me?
pick them over choose carefully Some of these cherries are
not ripe; you will have to
pick them over.
start it over begin it again 1 love that song; please start
it over.
take it over do it again He failed the course and had
to take it over.
think it over consider it Please think over our offer.
turn it over move it other side up Turn the pot over and see
where it was made.

call us up telephone us He called us up from Hawaii.

bring it up mention it Don’t bring up his accident.
cheer me up make me feel better The sun cheers me up.
clean it up put it in order She cleaned up her room.
fill it up fill it completely 1 got my tank filled up.
hang it up put it on a hanger/ You have to hang up your
coat.
put the phone down Please don’t hang it up.
keep it up don’t stop doing it The dancing is great. Keep it
up!
look it up research it I’ll look it up in the dictionary.
make it up do missed work/ He can make up the test he
missed.
invent it He made up a crazy story.
pick it up put it in your hands The bag is there; pick it up.
show her up surpass her publicly The new singer showed her
up.
stand him up not meet him as promised She stood him up last night.
take it up discuss it/ They took it up with the boss.
make it smaller, shorter The seamstress took up my
skirt.
tear it up destroy it I’m glad you tore up that
photograph.
think it up invent it He thought up a wonderful
idea.
turn it up make it louder or stronger That song is great; turn it up!
wake him up make him stop sleeping He’s late for work; wake him
up!

follow it through make sure it is completed It’s a good project; make sure
you follow it through.
 164 Grammar
§17.

§17.7-2.2 NON-SEPARABLE VERB-PREPOSITION

COMBINATIONS

With non-separable verb-preposition combinations, the

object—noun or pronoun —must follow the preposition.

Pattern:
Subject Verb Preposition Object
She cares for John.
She cares for him.

Do Not Use:
She cares John for.
She cares him for.

EXAMPLES
Verb + Preposition + Object Meaning
come across it find it unexpectedly 1 came across these old
photographs.
run across it find it unexpectedly He ran across his old report
cards.
come after me pursue me The reporters are coming
after me.
look after him be responsible for him His mom looks after him.
take after me have my characteristics My son takes after me.
ask for it request it You have to ask for the
medicine.
care for her love her She really cares for her
husband.
get back from it return from it When did you get back from
your vacation?
hear from them receive communication Have you heard from your
children?
get in it enter it 1 can’t wait to get in the pool.
check into it investigate it I’m going to check into that
situation.
run into it crash with it He ran into a tree!
run into him see him unexpectedly We ran into him at the mall.
look into it investigate it Please look into this problem.

hear of it have some knowledge of it 1 have never heard of that

language.
get out of it leave a small vehicle/ Help me get out of the canoe.
be excused from it She promised to babysit; now
she wants to get out of it.
keep out of it not become involved with it You should keep out of their
fight.
§17. Prepositions 165

Verb + Preposition + Object Meaning

run out of it use all of it 1 ran out of laundry detergent.
stay out of it not become involved with it He tried to stay out of their
argument.
drop out of it stop participating in it She dropped out of that
organization.
get off it leave a vehicle you ride on He had to get off the bus.
call on him ask him for help You can call on him any time.
drop in on us visit us unexpectedly Please drop in on us when
you can.
get on it enter a vehicle you ride on They got on the train at the
station.
look out for it be prepared for danger Look out for the potholes in
the street.

go over it review it She went over her paper last

night.
get over it recover from it He finally got over the flu.
run over it destroy it with a vehicle My hat blew off and a car ran
over it.

catch up with him reach him The police chased him and
finally caught up with him.
learn his news 1 haven’t seen him in a long
time; 1 want to catch up with
him.
fool around with it play with it Stop fooling around with your
pencil and get to work.
get along with them not fight with them She is trying to get along with
her neighbors.
get away with it not be punished for doing it He cheated and got away with
it.
get through with it finish something difficult She finally got through with
her thesis.
keep up with her be equal to her She is really good, but I’m
trying to keep up with her.
put up with her tolerate her She irritates me, but I’m trying
to put up with her.

Preposition combinations are tricky. They are often illogical, they sometimes have
more than one meaning, and they sometimes change in meaning. Learn them as
you come across them.

COMMON VERB-PREPOSITION
COMBINATIONS WITH SPECIAL MEANINGS
blow up explode The house caught on fire when the furnace blew up.
blow up get angry He blew up when he saw the credit card bill,
blow down destroy by wind The hurricane could blow the house down,
blow over be forgotten The scandal will blow over shortly,
blow out burst I sure hope my tire doesn’t blow out.
 166 Grammar
§17.

break in force open The thief broke in and took our computer.
break out erupt Her skin broke out in a rash.
break up end a relationship The couple broke up after a year of marriage.
break down stop functioning Her car broke down on the highway.

bring on cause Her hospital stay brought on pneumonia.

bring about cause They hope to bring about peace in that area.
bring up begin to talk about She always brings up irrelevant subjects.
bring up raise children I was brought up in a strict home.
bring down cause to fail That behavior brought down the government.
care for take charge of The nurses cared for him during the day.
care for love We all care for him.
care about have interest in She doesn’t care about anybody but herself.
carry on continue We must carry on after he retires.
carry on misbehave She carries on at that bar every night.
carry out follow plans We must carry out this project properly.
carry through finish We will carry through with his plans.
catch on understand I don’t think he catches on.
catch up reach the others It is hard to catch up when you have been away.
close up end the business day That shop closes up at eight o’clock.
close down end the business That store closed down two years ago.
close in surround The police are closing in on the escapee.
close out stop selling an item The store closed out of those fans.

come out join society Come out and join the fun!
come down on punish The judge really came down on him.
come through be reliable A good friend always comes through.
come about happen How did all this come about?
come over affect Something strange has come over him.
do in beat up Don’t let them do you in.
do up improve The make-up artist really did her up.
do over remodel We want to do over the basement.
drop in visit without notice Please drop in to see me.
drop by visit without notice Please drop by to see me.
drop out stop going to school She dropped out last year.
fall out shed Her hair is falling out because of the operation.
fall out end a friendship They fell out after that argument.
fall off fall from a height The man fell off the ladder.
fall down fall to the ground He was running too fast, and he fell down.
fall through not happen as planned Our vacation plans fell through.
fall for accept naively Don’t fall for his charm; it’s an act.
fall in associate with an He fell in with a gang downtown.
undesirable group
fall over faint She fell over in the middle of the concert.
get over recover I hope you get over your bad cold soon.
get around avoid He’s trying to get around that regulation.
get through finish Try to get through early.
get by survive We’re not rich, but we get by.
get on get older Her father is getting on, but he’s lively.
get with be aware Don’t just hang around; get with it!
§17. Prepositions 167

get about move It’s hard for him to get about with crutches.
get in enter 1 was getting in the car when 1 fell down.
get out be dismissed They get out of school before 1 get out of work.
get out remove 1 hope the dry cleaners can get this spot out.

give in surrender to pressure Mom gave in and let me have a party.

give up stop making an effort Don’t give up; keep on practicing.
give out distribute They asked us to give out these brochures.

go on happen What’s going on? There’s so much noise!

go for like a lot 1 really go for the new styles.
go with look good with Does this blouse go with this skirt?
go with date steadily My friend goes with my brother.
go out socialize You need to go out more.
go in for take interest in He doesn’t go in for museums.
go out for compete for a team Her nephew is going out for the baseball team.
go through suffer It’s hard to imagine what you are going through.
go through sort 1 spent all morning going through my bills.
go by pass Did you see that car go by?
go about wander He just goes about happily.
go around wander She always goes around with a smile on her face.

hand in give to an authority You have to hand this in to the teacher.

hand out distribute The teacher handed it out to us.
hand over give under duress She had to hand the letter over to the judge.

hang out relax They come home from school and hang out.
hang around linger idly 1 wish he didn’t hang around here so much.
hang up put clothing up He doesn’t have time to hang up his clothes.
hang up end a phone call Please don’t hang up! We need to talk.

have on be wearing What do you have on?

have to must We have to learn this.
have over invite to one’s home 1 would love to have you over.

hear of know about I’ve never heard of him. Who is he?

hear from get news of Did you hear from your friends in Phoenix?

keep on continue Keep on trying! You’ll make it.

keep away not get close Keep away from that fence.
keep off not tread on They told us to keep off their property.
keep out not enter 1 have to keep out of my brother’s room.
keep in not allow out His mother keeps him in all afternoon.
keep up stay apace I’m trying to keep up, but I’m tired.
keep at not stop Keep at it; you’ll make it.
keep for guard My friend kept my watch for me while 1 played.

kick around abuse 1 wish he didn’t kick his dog around so much.
kick out dismiss The principal kicked them out of school.
kick in add help When the weather gets cold, the heater kicks in.
kick over think about Kick this idea over, and let me know what you decide

live for love She lives for her job.

live to enjoy They live to dance.
live on continue living Our ancestors live on in our memories.
live on depend on for life They live on bread and water.
live through suffer You will have to live through this period.
 168 Grammar
§17.

look for search I’m looking for my glasses.

look at observe She’s looking at my magazine.
look through examine and search We looked through our files, and found this.
look over scan They’re looking over the new books.
look into investigate The police are looking into this incident.
look around observe, relaxed They’re having fun looking around the city.
look over observe for selection The teachers are looking over the textbooks.
look in check I’ll look in this afternoon, to see how you are.
look out be careful Look out! There’s a car coming.
look up search for information Look those words up in the dictionary.
look after take care of A nice woman looks after my children.
look down on feel superior to Never look down on anyone.
look up to respect I always looked up to my Latin teacher.
pass on tell others Please don’t pass that information on.
pass by ignore He passed us by when he came to town.
pass for be accepted falsely She’s only sixteen, but she passes for twenty-one.
pass in give to an authority We had to pass our tests in to the teacher.
pass over not promote They passed him over; he will not be a director.
pass through visit on the way Don’t fall for him; he’s only passing through.
pass out lose consciousness He passed out from the heat.
pass up miss an opportunity Don’t pass up these bargains.
pick up put in your hands Pick up your pencil and write.
pick up collect Help me pick up the trash.
pick up give a ride to My mother is coming to pick me up.
pick out select Help us pick out the prizes.
pick over choose carefully You have to pick over these cherries carefully.
pick on selectively mistreat I think the coach picks on your daughter.
pick at scratch Try not to pick at your sore.
put on begin to wear Put on your coat and go home.
put off postpone It rained, so they put off the picnic.
put out extinguish The rain put out the fire.
put down release Put your bags down and rest.
put through allow contact The secretary put us through to the chief.
run around socialize indiscriminately I think he runs around with a wild group.
run into meet by accident We ran into an old friend at the mall.
run for seek election Are you running for office this term?
run out of exhaust a supply of We ran out of gas, and had to walk.
run up spend a lot He ran up a huge bill at the restaurant.
run by tell something Let me run this by you to see what you think.
run over go over with a vehicle He ran over my hat with his motorcycle.
run down not take care of They really ran that house down.
see to take responsibility They will behave; I’ll see to that myself.
see through detect Can you see my scar through these stockings?
see through not abandon I’ll stay with you; I’ll see you through.
show up appear Her brother showed up two hours late.
show through be visible Yes, your scar shows through your stockings.
show around take on a tour Please show us around your new house.
stand up be erect on your feet Stand up when he comes in the room.
stand for mean What do your initials stand for?
stand for believe in What does your club stand for?
stand for allow I will not stand for cheating in my class.
§17. Prepositions 169

stand out look different That bright color stands out from the rest.
stand in substitute Cecily is standing in for the main singer tonight.
stand by wait Please stand by; we’ll have news in a minute.
stand by give support He stands by his wife despite her bad behavior.
take in make smaller The seamstress took my dress in for me.
take in give shelter to She takes in anybody who needs help.
take off remove Please take off your shoes.
take off leave What time did the plane take off?
take off not go to work Do you think you can take off tomorrow?
take for believe to be He takes me for a weakling.
take on accept responsibility for Are you going to take that project on?
take up pursue an interest He took up gardening recently.
take up make shorter I took my skirt up three inches.
take down write an account of Be sure to take this information down.
take out invite to go out I’d like to take you out sometime.
take over assume responsibility That bully always takes over.
take around give a tour Will you take us around the mall?

tear up destroy She tore up the paper.

tear down destroy They tore down the building.
tear out remove I tore the check out of the checkbook.

think of have in one’s mind I’m thinking of you.

think about have in one’s mind Are you thinking about me?
think through consider carefully We need to think this problem through.
think over consider carefully Before we buy the house, we have to think it over.
think up invent He thought up a wonderful solution.

throw out discard Throw out those tennis shoes.

throw away discard Throw away those tennis shoes.
throw over remove from power We will throw that bully over.
throw up vomit I am sorry you threw up your dinner.

tie in relate Your report ties in with our new project.

tie on attach with a cord Tie a bow on the package.
tie up immobilize They tied up all the telephone lines.
tie up put a cord around Help me tie up this box.

try to make an effort Try to finish on time.

try on put on to test May I try this dress on?
try out use to test May I try this bicycle out?
try out audition She is trying out for the school play.

turn on start a machine or light You can turn on the light now.
turn out end Everything turned out all right.
turn out extinguish a light You can turn out the light now.
turn off extinguish a light or You can turn off the machine now.
machine
turn to ask for help from I always turn to you when I have a problem.
turn up appear unexpectedly He turned up after three years of absence.
turn in go to bed I’m tired. I’m going to turn in.
turn down refuse an offer He turned down that job.
turn over move halfway around Turn over and go to sleep.
turn away face a different direction She turned away when he said hello.

wear off disappear The tread wore off my tires after six months.
wear out become useless My tires wear out in six months.
 §18.
Adverbs
The question words “Where?” “When?” and “How?” and
individual words that answer these questions are adverbs.

§18.1
ADVERBS OF An adverb can tell the place of the subject after the verb be,
LOCATION or tell the place of the action after other verbs.

Prepositions as Adverbs
Certain prepositions function as adverbs when they are not
followed by an object:

in, inside, out, outside

in front, in back, behind
over, up
down, below, under, underneath
close, near, far
across, by, past, and through

Question Answer
Where is he? He is out.
Where do they live? They don’t live far.

Other Adverbs of Location Meaning

here in this place
there in that place
everywhere in all places
nowhere not in any place
not anywhere not in any place
anywhere in all possible places
away in another place
indoors in a building
inside in a building
outdoors not in a building
outside not in a building
upstairs on the floor above
downstairs on the floor below
high a distance above
low a distance below
underneath below

170
§18. Adverbs 171

Adverbs of location are usually placed after the verb.

Question Answer
Where is the airport? It is there.
Where are Alice and Jerry? They are away.
Where are the stores? They are nearby.
Where is Joe? He is here.
Where are you going? 1 am not going far.
Where does he work? He works upstairs.
Where did she go? She went outside.
Where have they gone? They have gone ahead.
Where will we see you? We will see you below.

To show surprise or excitement, put the adverb before the

subject:
Here he is! Up you go! Away they went!
§18.2
ADVERBS OF An adverb can tell the time of the subject after be or the
TIME time of the action after other verbs.

Prepositions as Adverbs
The preposition before functions as an adverb when it is
not followed by an object.
Question Answer
Was he here? Yes. He was here before.

Other Adverbs of Time Meaning

now at the present time
then at that time, or after that
soon a short time after now
later after now, after then
afterwards after now, after then

early before the expected time

late after the expected time

momentarily very soon

yet now, as expected
already before now
recently a short time before now
lately a short time before now
still now, as before
not anymore not now, as before

ago a length of time before now

today the present day

tonight today at night
yesterday the day before today
tomorrow the day after today
172 Grammar §18

Adjective + Noun Combinations as Adverbs of Time

the day
before yesterday two days ago
the day
after tomorrow two days after now
this morning the morning of today; can be present
or past
present It is 9:00 A.M. The sun is shining this
morning.
past It is 2:00 P.M. It is raining now. The sun
was shining this morning.
this afternoon the afternoon of today; can be
present, past, or future
future It is 9:00 A.M. The sun is shining. It is
going to rain this afternoon.
present It is 2:00 P.M. It is raining this
afternoon.
past It is 10:00 P.M. It is clear now, but it
was raining this afternoon.
this evening the evening of today; can be present,
past, or future
future It is 2:00 P.M. It is going to clear up
this evening.
present It is 7:00 P.M. It is clear this evening.
past It is 10:00 P.M. It stopped raining this
evening at 6:00 P.M.
this week the present week
this Tuesday the nearest Tuesday to today; can be
past or future
this month the present month
this February the nearest February to now; can be
past or future
last night the night before today
last week the week before this week
the week before the week before last week
last
last Friday the Friday before now
last month the month before this month
last May the May before now
last year the year before this year
next week the week after the present week
the week after the week after next week
next
§18. Adverbs 173

next Friday the Friday of the present week or the

Friday of next week
next month the month after the present month
next May the next future May; can be this year
or next year
next year the year after the present year
sometime an unspecified future time

Adverbs of time are usually placed after the verb.

Question Answer
What time is it? It is early.
When is your birthday? It is this Friday.
When is the best time? It is now.
When are the parties? They are tomorrow.
When was the wedding? It was last week.
When are you coming? I’m coming now.
When were they studying? They were studying then.
When did she tell you? She told me recently.
When did they move here? They moved here five years ago.

Exceptions:
Already is placed:
• after a form of be.
I am already a doctor.
• after an auxiliary verb.
I have already finished medical school.
He is already working on his thesis.
Is she here yet? Yes, she is already here.
No, she isn’t here yet.
• before or after other verbs.
I already studied chemistry.
I studied chemistry already.
Still is placed:
• after a form of be.
I am still here.
We are still upstairs.
• after an auxiliary verb.
We are still waiting.
You should still try.
• before other verbs.
He still plays golf every day.
I still want to see you.
Are they still talking? Yes, they are still talking.
No, they are not talking
anymore.
174 Grammar
§18.

§18.3
ADVERBS OF An adverb can tell the number of times an action occurs.
INSTANCE These adverbs are placed at the end of the phrase.

once one time

twice two times
again one more time

Adjective + noun combinations as adverbs:

three times ten times a hundred times

Question Answer
How many times are you going to call? I’m going to call once.
How many times did you see the movie? 1 saw it twice.
How many times will they come back? They will come back again.
How many times did you go to the store? We went four times.

§18.4
ADVERBS OF An adverb can tell the frequency of an action. The adverb
FREQUENCY comes before the verb.

Question Answer Meaning

How often do you 1 never study. 0 percent of the time
study? 1 hardly ever study. almost never
1 rarely study. almost never
1 seldom study. almost never
1 occasionally study. 25-50 percent of the
time
1 often study. 50-75 percent of the
time
1 frequently study. 50-75 percent of the
time
1 usually study. 75-90 percent of the
time
1 always study. 100 percent of the
time

Sometimes can be placed after the verb or before the subject.

I study sometimes. 25-50 percent of the
Sometimes I study. time

Once, twice, or x times a week is placed after the verb or

before the subject.
I study twice a week.
Twice a week I study.
§18. Adverbs 175

§18.5
ADVERBS OF An adverb can indicate the way an action is performed.
MANNER Most adverbs of manner are formed by adding ly to an
adjective.

slowly quickly
softly loudly
sweetly sourly
nicely meanly
carefully carelessly

When the adjective ends in y, drop the y and add ily.

crazy crazily
noisy noisily
busy busily
happy happily

When the adjective ends in le, change the le to ly.

responsible responsibly
capable capably
comparable comparably

A few adverbs are the same as their corresponding

adjectives.

fast fast
hard hard
late late
early early

The adverb that corresponds to the adjective good is well.

The adverb that corresponds to the adjective bad is badly.
The adverb is placed after the verb when there is no object.

How do you dance? I dance well.

I dance fast.
I dance badly.
I dance slowly.
176 Grammar §18.

When there is a direct object, the adverb is placed after it.

How do you dance? I dance the waltz well.

I dance the waltz fast.
I dance the waltz badly.
I dance the waltz slowly.

Do not place the adverb between the verb and the direct
object.

Do Not Use: I dance well the waltz.

Note: Several words that end in ly are adjectives, not

adverbs; they do not have corresponding adverb forms.

friendly lively
ugly lovely
sickly lonely
deadly cowardly
heavenly

§18.6
COMPARING (a) Before adverbs that end in iy,
ADVERBS OF use more + adverb + than for a positive comparison:
She works more slowly than I do.
MANNER Kyung checks his work more carefully than
Thomas does.
use not as + adverb + as for a negative comparison:
I don’t work as slowly as she does.

The negative superlative is rarely used. Use the adjective

instead:
Awkward: Thomas works the least carefully of all.
Better: Thomas is the least careful of all.
Even better: Thomas is not as careful as the others.

(b) With fast, hard, late, and early,

add erfor a positive comparison:
I work faster than she does.
Brenda works harder than Thomas does.
§18. Adverbs 177

Brenda works later than Thomas does.

Thomas leaves earlier than Brenda does.
use the + adverb + est for the superlative:
She works the fastest of all.
Brenda works the hardest of all.
Brenda works the latest of all.
Thomas leaves the earliest of all.
use not as + adverb + as for a negative comparison:
She doesn’t work as fast as I do.
Thomas doesn’t work as hard as Brenda does.
Brenda doesn’t leave as early as Thomas does.
use not as + adverb + as + the others for the negative
superlative:
He does not work as fast as the others.
He does not work as hard as the others.
He does not work as late as the others.
She does not leave as early as the others.

(c) With well,

use better than for a positive comparison or a superlative:
She works better than he does.
She works better than the others.
use not as well as for a negative comparison or a
superlative:
She doesn’t play as well as her friend.
She doesn’t play as well as the others.
178 Grammar
§18

§18.7
ADVERBS An adverb can indicate the intensity of the action of a verb.
THAT
almost not quite
INTENSIFY nearly not quite
VERBS hardly a little, but not enough
scarcely a little, but not enough
only in a limited way
just a little
somewhat a little
well enough in a satisfactory way
really very well

Almost, nearly, hardly, scarcely, only, just, and really

are placed before the verb. When used with a progressive
tense, they separate the be form from the ing form —
see §9.

A little, very little, somewhat, well enough, and well are

placed after the verb.

Question Answer Meaning

Does the engine run? It almost runs. It doesn’t run but it might
Is the engine running? It is almost running. run soon.
It nearly runs. It doesn’t run yet.
It is nearly running.
It hardly runs. It runs very little.
It is hardly running.
It scarcely runs. It runs very little.
It is scarcely running.
It just runs. It runs a little bit.
It is just running.
It runs somewhat. It runs a little bit.
It only runs a little. It just runs somewhat.
It runs well enough. It runs in a satisfactory
way.
It really runs. It runs well.
It is really running.
§18. Adverbs 179

§18.8
ADVERBS An adverb can indicate the intensityoi an adjective or of
THAT another adverb.

INTENSIFY Question Answer Meaning

ADJECTIVES adverb + adjective
How good is she? She is fairly good. She is average.
AND OTHER She is pretty good. She is better than
ADVERBS She is rather good.
average.
She is better than
average.
She is quite good. She is better than
average.
She is very good. She is much better
than average.
She is extremely good. She is excellent.
She is unusually good. She is outstanding.
She is too good. She is so good that it
is bad.
She is not too good. She is pretty bad.

adverb + adverb
How does she work? She works fairly quickly. She works faster than
average
She works pretty quickly. She works faster than
average.
She works rather quickly. She works faster than
average.
She works quite quickly. She works faster than
average.
She works very quickly. She works faster than
average.
She works extremely She works much faster
quickly. than average.
She works unusually She works faster than
quickly. most people.
She works too quickly. She works so fast that
it is bad.
 §19.
Conjunctions
A conjunction is a word that connects words, phrases, or
clauses. Each conjunction defines a specific relationship
between the parts it connects.

§19.1
COORDINATING A coordinating conjunction joins sentence parts that have
CONJUNCTIONS the same grammatical form.
(a) And indicates similarity.
The skirt and blouse are yellow. The skirt is yellow.
The blouse is yellow.
Sally was singing and dancing. Sally was singing.
Sally was dancing.
David worked slowly and carefully. David worked slowly.
David worked
carefully.

(b) Or indicates a necessary choice.

I want an apple or an orange. I want only one piece
of fruit.
She is from Chicago or New York. She is from one of
these cities.

(c) But indicates difference.

Note: Use a comma before but
Jane went to the movies, Jane went to the
but I didn’t (go). movies.
I didn’t go to the
movies.
I like oranges, but not grapefruit. I like oranges.
I don’t like grapefruit.
I like oranges, but he likes / like oranges.
grapefruit. He likes grapefruit.

180
§19. Conjunctions 181

David worked slowly, but not David worked slowly,

carefully. David did not work
carefully.

(d) Yet indicates difference that is not logical.

Note: Use a comma before yet.
Jane was tired, yet happy. Jane was tired.
Jane was happy.
I dieted, yet lost no weight. I dieted.
I didn’t lose weight.
David worked hard, yet he David worked hard.
didn’t receive payment. David did not receive
payment.

(e) For connects a fact with its cause.

Note: Use a comma before for.
Mary went home, for she was sick. Mary went home, (fact)
Mary was sick,
(reason)
I am sure Bob was there, for I am sure Bob was
I saw him. there, (fact)
I saw him. (reason)
They are late, for they got lost. They are late, (fact)
They got lost, (reason)

(f) So indicates a result.

Note: Use a comma before so:
Mary was sick, so she went home. Mary was sick, (fact)
Mary went home,
(result)
They got lost, so they were late. They got lost, (fact)
They were late,
(result)

§19.1-1
Joining (a) A coordinating conjunction can join two independent
Independent clauses to make one sentence.

Clauses EXAMPLES
John is my brother, and Mary is my sister.
I sold my house yesterday, but I didn’t sell my car.
182 Grammar §19.

(b) Use too, so, either, and neitherwWh coordinating

conjunctions for emphasis.
(1) To join two affirmative clauses, use:
and + subject + verb + too or and so + verb + subject
EXAMPLES
John is tall. Bob is tall.
John is tall, and Bob is too. or John is tall, and so is
Bob.
Mary is singing. Carol is
singing.
Mary is singing, and Carol or Mary is singing, and so
is too. is Carol.
Ted drives to work. Joe
drives to work.
Ted drives to work, and or Ted drives to work, and
Joe does too. so does Joe.
(2) To join two negative clauses, use:
use:
and + subject + verb or and neither + verb +
+ not either subject
EXAMPLES
John isn’t tall. I am not tall.
John isn’t tall, and I’m John isn’t tall, and
not either. neither am I.
Mary isn’t singing. Carol
isn’t singing.
Mary isn’t singing, and Mary isn’t singing, and
Carol isn’t either. neither is Carol.
Ted didn’t drive to work.
Joe didn’t drive to work.
Ted didn’t drive to work, Ted didn’t drive to work,
and Joe didn’t either. and neither did Joe.
(3) To join one affirmative clause and one negative
clause, use:
but + subject + be or auxiliary verb + not
EXAMPLES
Mary is short. Donna isn’t short.
Mary is short, but Donna isn’t.

He lives here. I don’t live here.

He lives here, but I don’t.
§19. Conjunctions 183

Carol was singing. Joe wasn’t singing.

Carol was singing, but Joe wasn’t.

Joe drove to work. Ted didn’t drive to work.

Joe drove to work, but Ted didn’t.
(4) To join one negative clause and one affirmative
clause, use:
but + subject + be or auxiliary verb
EXAMPLES
Donna isn’t short. Mary is short.
Donna isn’t short, but Mary is.

I don’t live here. He lives here.

I don’t live here, but he does.

Joe wasn’t singing. Carol was singing.

Joe wasn’t singing, but Carol was.

Ted didn’t drive to work. Joe drove to work.

Ted didn’t drive to work, but Joe did.

§19.2
CORRELATIVE Correlative conjunctionsare pairs of conjunctions. The first
CONJUNCTIONS conjunction emphasizes the meaning of the second.
(a) both... and emphasizes the equality of two items:
She wants both ice cream and cake.

(b) not only... but also emphasizes the equal importance

of the second item:
She wants not only ice cream, but also cake.

(c) either... or emphasizes the need to choose only one

item:
She wants either ice cream or cake.

(d) neither... nor emphasizes that both items are negative:

She wants neither ice cream nor cake.

(e) whether... or not emphasizes that the first item is

more important than the second:
She will eat ice cream whether or not she eats
cake,
or
She will eat ice cream whether she eats cake or
not.
184 Grammar §19.

§19.3
SUBORDINATING A subordinating conjunction begins a subordinate clause
CONJUNCTIONS and shows its relationship with the main clause.
(a) Time relationships:
before earlier action
after later action
until a limited time of action
when a specific time of action
while action at the same time

The subordinate clause can come first, followed by a

comma:
Before we went home, we washed the dishes.
After I went to bed, I fell asleep.
Until he gets here, I am going to stay.
When he gets here, I am going to leave.
While she sleeps, he watches the baby.

The main clause can come first, and there is no comma:

We washed the dishes before we went home.
I fell asleep after I went to bed.
I am going to stay until he gets here.
I am going to leave when he gets here.
He watches the baby while she sleeps.

(b) Resulting relationships:

so that to make action possible
So that she can read, she wears glasses.
She wears glasses so that she can read.

(c) Conditional relationships:

if action dependent on other action
unless required action to avoid negative
action
whether (or not) action on any condition
If you come early, I will dance with you.
Unless you come early, I won’t dance with you.
Whether you come early or not, I won’t dance with
you.
I will dance with you if you come early.
I won’t dance with you unless you come early.
I won’t dance with you whether or not you come
early.
§19. Conjunctions 185

(d) Other relationships:

where a specific place
as if in an untrue manner
rather than preferable action
that a fact
whether unknown information
Where you live, there is a lot of traffic.
As if they weren’t scared, they got on the plane.
Rather than upset her mother, she stayed home.
That she is a genius is certain.
Whether he went to work I don’t know, (awkward)
There is a lot of traffic where you live.
They got on the plane as if they weren’t scared.
She stayed home rather than upset her mother.
It is certain that she is a genius.
I don’t know whether he went to work.
 §20.
Discourse Markers
Discourse markers are words and expressions that tell the
listener or reader how to interpret the words that follow
them. Some basic messages and the discourse markers
that introduce them are illustrated in this chapter. Discourse
markers can be confusing, as they do not have exact equiv-
alents in any two languages.

§20.1
EXPRESSING The following discourse markers are used to describe the
CHRONOLOG- order in which actions happen, as in a story or in giving
directions:
ICAL ORDER
(a) To introduce the first action: First/In the first place

(b) To introduce the second action: Second/Next

(c) To introduce the action that follows the previous action

described: Then /Next/After that

(d) To introduce an action that occurs at the same time as

another action: Meanwhile/In the meantime

(e) To introduce the final action: Finally

(f) To add an action that happened after the main story is

finished: Subsequently

The word then is not followed by a comma. All of the other

expressions in this section are followed by a comma.

EXAMPLES
A story: “Not my favorite day”
First, / In the first place, my car broke down on
the highway.
Second, / Next, I realized that my cell phone didn’t
work.
Then / Next, a policeman came and gave me a
ticket.

186
§20. Discourse Markers 187

Then / After that, I waited an hour and a half for a

tow truck.
Meanwhile, / In the meantime, since I couldn’t find
anything to read, I sat there the whole time with
nothing to do.
Finally, the tow truck arrived and took my car
away. (Fortunately, they took me home too.)
Subsequently, I received a huge bill from the
repair shop.

A recipe: “An easy cake”

First, buy a cake mix, a can of frosting, vegetable
oil, and eggs.
Next, preheat the oven and grease two cake pans.
Then mix everything together with an electric
mixer.
After that, pour the batter into the pans and place
them in the oven.
After about thirty minutes, take the cakes out of
the oven, remove them from the pans, and let
them cool.
Finally, put the cakes on a serving plate and frost
them.

§20.2
MAKING AN The following discourse markers are used to introduce new
ARGUMENT information or to make an argument more convincing.

MORE (a) To add the first information:

CONVINCING
and / also / as well as

Do not use a comma after and or as well as.

We should hire him.
He is intelligent and responsible.
He is intelligent as well as responsible.

Use a comma after also when it occurs at the beginning of

a clause, but not if it is in the middle of one.
He is intelligent; also, he is responsible.
He is intelligent; he is also responsible.
188 Grammar §20.

(b) To add the next information:

in addition / plus

We should hire him.

He is intelligent and responsible; in addition, he
has a lot of experience.
He is intelligent and responsible, plus, he has a lot
of experience.

(c) To add information to defend a negative position:

besides

I don’t want to hire him.

He is lazy and irresponsible. Besides, he has no
experience in this field.

(d) To add still more information:

furthermore

We should hire him.

He is intelligent and responsible; in addition, he
has a lot of experience.
Furthermore, he is cheerful and great to work with.

(e) To add more surprising information:

on top of that/to top it all off

We should hire him.

He is intelligent and responsible; in addition, he has
a lot of experience.
Furthermore, he is cheerful and great to work with.
On top of that, he works at night and on weekends.
To top it all off, he works at night and on weekends.

(f) To add the final and most important information:

moreover

We should hire him.

He is intelligent and responsible; in addition, he has
a lot of experience.
§20. Discourse Markers 189

Furthermore, he is cheerful and great to work with.

On top of that, he works at night and on weekends.
Moreover, he has already been approved for the
position by the committee.

Use a comma after in addition, plus, besides, furthermore,

on top of that, to top it all off, and moreover.

§20.3
ILLUSTRATING The following discourse markers can be used to introduce
PREVIOUS information that reinforces a previously stated comment.
Use a comma after these expressions.
INFORMATION
in fact/as a matter of fact / indeed /actually

EXAMPLES
Yes, I know Washington quite well; in fact / as a matter of
fact, / indeed, / actually, I lived there for ten years.
Sure, I know where Park Street is; in fact, / as a matter of
fact, / indeed, / actually, I’m on my way there now.
She’s a very smart girl; in fact, / as a matter of fact, /
indeed, / actually, she’s the best student in the class.
He’s a good man; in fact, / as a matter of fact, / indeed, /
actually, he’s one of the nicest people I know.
No, she doesn’t work here. In fact, / As a matter of fact, /
Indeed, / Actually, I’ve never seen her before.

§20.4
CONTRADICT- The following discourse markers can be used to contradict
ING PREVIOUS a previous statement.

INFORMATION (a) To introduce information that contrasts with the previ-

ous information:

but / however

Use a comma before but. Do not use a comma after but.

He’s intelligent, but he’s irresponsible.

Use a period or a semi-colon or a comma before however.

Use a comma after however:
He’s intelligent; however, he’s irresponsible.
190 Grammar §20.

(b) To introduce an opposing statement:

on the other hand /in contrast

Use a comma after these expressions.

He’s lazy and irresponsible. His brother, on the other
hand, / in contrast, is a very hard worker.

(c) To introduce a statement that is not logical or expected

in view of the previous information:

nevertheless / still

Use a comma after these expressions.

He’s lazy and irresponsible; nevertheless, / still, I
think we should give him a chance.

(d) To introduce a replacement for an item in the previous

statement:

instead

Use a comma after instead when it occurs at the beginning

of a sentence. Do not use a comma before instead when it
occurs at the end of a sentence.
I don’t want to hire him; instead, we should hire
his brother.
I don’t want to hire him; we should hire his brother
instead.

(e) To introduce an opposite result if a condition is not met:

otherwise

Use a comma after otherwise when it occurs at the begin-

ning of a sentence. Do not use a comma before otherwise
when it occurs at the end of a sentence.
He will get a promotion; otherwise, he will move to
another company.
He will get a promotion; he will move to another
company otherwise.
§20. Discourse Markers 191

§20.5
CORRECTING The following discourse markers can be used to introduce
PREVIOUS information that corrects a previous statement.

INFORMATION in fact /as a matter of fact /actually /(a pause)

Use a comma after in fact, as a matter of fact, or actually.

No, he isn’t short; in fact, / as a matter of fact, /
actually, / (a pause) he’s quite tall.
No, I’m not her boss; in fact, / as a matter of fact, /
actually, / (a pause) she’s my boss.
He isn’t an architect; (pause) he’s an engineer.

§20.6
INDICATING The following discourse markers may be used to add infor-
THE CONSE- mation that describes the consequences of an action.

QUENCES OF so /consequently / therefore / thus /as a result

AN ACTION
Do not use a comma after so or then.

Use a comma after consequently, therefore, thus, and as a

result.
We went to Mia’s house, but she wasn’t there, so we
came back.
We went to Mia’s house, but she wasn’t there; so /
consequently, / therefore, she doesn’t know the
news.
We were unable to contact her. Thus, / As a result,
she doesn’t know the news.

§20.7
EXPLAINING The following discourse markers can introduce statements
PREVIOUS that clarify or elaborate on previous information.

INFORMATION (a) To introduce another way of saying something:

in other words / that is /1 mean

Use a comma after these expressions.

I think we should look at other programs; in other
words, this one is unworkable.
She lives pretty far out of town, that is, beyond the
beltway.
I want to go on a vacation. I mean, I really need a rest.
192 Grammar §20.

(b) To suggest an example of several choices:

for example / for instance

Use a comma before or after these expressions.

You need a rest. Take a week off and go to the beach,
for example. / for instance.
You need a rest. For example, / for instance, take a
week off and go to the beach.

(c) To give a specific example:

specifically

Use a comma after specifically.

I want to take some time off, specifically, the month of
July, so I can attend a wedding in my country.

§20.8
REDUCING The following discourse markers may be used to change
THE IMPOR- the perspective of a previous statement.

TANCE OF THE (a) To add information that becomes more important than
PREVIOUS the previous information:
INFORMATION
anyway /anyhow/at any rate/in any case

Use a comma after these expressions, but not before them.

I don’t want that job, but I’m sending them my resume
anyway. / anyhow.
It’s too bad she lost her job. At any rate / In any case,
she doesn’t have to worry, because her husband
earns good money.

(b) To add a comment that explains why the previous infor-

mation is not important:

after all

I don’t like the new car he bought, but after all, it’s his
car, not mine.
§20. Discourse Markers 193

§20.9
VERIFYING The following expressions can be used to emphasize the
validity of your comments.
PREVIOUS
INFORMATION Use a comma after these discourse markers.

(a) To emphasize that the previous statement is true:

really / indeed

I want to thank you all for coming to this graduation

ceremony; really, / indeed, it is wonderful to see
you all.

(b) To indicate that your audience already knows that the

previous information is true:

naturally / of course / certainly

Naturally, / Of course, / Certainly, all of the students

are happy that this day has finally arrived.

§20.10
EXPRESSING The following discourse markers can explain the motive of
an action.
REASONS
FOR AN (a) To inform someone of the reason for an action:
ACTION
because

Do not use a comma before or after because.

She invited you to her party because she likes you.

(b) To refer to the already known motive of an action:

since

Use a comma after the clause introduced by since:

Since she likes you, she invited you to her party.
Since she invited you, you should tell her whether you
are going or not.

(c) To express “considering the fact that”:

since
194 Grammar §20.

Since she got here early, I asked her to help me

set the table.
Since we’re going to the same hotel, let’s share
a taxi.
Since you didn’t sleep last night, you should take
a nap.
Since I don’t have any money, he bought my ticket.

Do not confuse these meanings of since with that of the

preposition since (see §17.3).

§20.11
EXPRESSING The following discourse markers can be used to explain
CONCESSION one’s reason for an action.
OR CONDITION Use a comma before these expressions, but not after them.

(a) To introduce an illogical fact in view of the information in

the accompanying clause:

although /even though/in spite of the fact that

She worked all day, although / even though / in

spite of the fact that she was sick.
Although / Even though / In spite of the fact that
she was sick, she worked all day.

(b) To indicate an extreme example that illogically does not

change the accompanying information:

even if

She won’t accept the job, even if we triple her

present salary.
Even if we triple her present salary, she won’t
accept the job.

(c) To indicate something that is not true and that if it were

true it would not change the accompanying information:

even if+ subjunctive + would

Even if he were the last man on earth, I wouldn’t

marry him.
§20. Discourse Markers 195

I wouldn’t marry him even if he were the last man

on earth.

See §16 for more information on subjunctives and §16.4 for

details on wouid.

§20.12
SUMMARIZING The following expressions express a conclusion to a series
of events. Use a comma after these discourse markers.

(a) To give the last detail of a story:

so / in the end

So, / In the end, they solved all their problems and

lived happily ever after.

(b) To sum up what was previously said:

in short /in summary

In short, / In summary, we have made a lot of

progress, but we still have a lot to do.

(c) To end a presentation of ideas:

in conclusion

In conclusion, I would like to thank all of you who

have worked so hard on this project.
c*
 Special Topics
§21,
Numbers
§21.1
WHOLE Read and say aloud the numbers between 0 and 99 as they
NUMBERS are written below:

1 one 26 twenty-six 51 fifty-one 76 seventy-six

2 two 27 twenty-seven 52 fifty-two 77 seventy-seven
3 three 28 twenty-eight 53 fifty-three 78 seventy-eight
4 four 29 twenty-nine 54 fifty-four 79 seventy-nine
5 five 30 thirty 55 fifty-five 80 eighty
6 six 31 thirty-one 56 fifty-six 81 eighty-one
7 seven 32 thirty-two 57 fifty-seven 82 eighty-two
8 eight 33 thirty-three 58 fifty-eight 83 eighty-three
9 nine 34 thirty-four 59 fifty-nine 84 eighty-four
10 ten 35 thirty-five 60 sixty 85 eighty-five
11 eleven 36 thirty-six 61 sixty-one 86 eighty-six
12 twelve 37 thirty-seven 62 sixty-two 87 eighty-seven
13 thirteen 38 thirty-eight 63 sixty-three 88 eighty-eight
14 fourteen 39 thirty-nine 64 sixty-four 89 eighty-nine
15 fifteen 40 forty 65 sixty-five 90 ninety
16 sixteen 41 forty-one 66 sixty-six 91 ninety-one
17 seventeen 42 forty-two 67 sixty-seven 92 ninety-two
18 eighteen 43 forty-three 68 sixty-eight 93 ninety-three
19 nineteen 44 forty-four 69 sixty-nine 94 ninety-four
20 twenty 45 forty-five 70 seventy 95 ninety-five
21 twenty-one 46 forty-six 71 seventy-one 96 ninety-six
22 twenty-two 47 forty-seven 72 seventy-two 97 ninety-seven
23 twenty-three 48 forty-eight 73 seventy-three 98 ninety-eight
24 twenty-four 49 forty-nine 74 seventy-four 99 ninety-nine
25 twenty-five 50 fifty 75 seventy-five

197
198 Grammar §21.

For the number 100 say one hundred or a hundred

200 two hundred
300 three hundred
400 four hundred
500 five hundred
600 six hundred
700 seven hundred
800 eight hundred
900 nine hundred

For numbers between the hundreds, say:

256 two hundred and fifty-six

649 six hundred and forty-nine
706 seven hundred and six

For the
number 1,000 say one thousand or a
thousand
20,000 twenty thousand
36,000 thirty-six thousand
400.000 four hundred thousand
512.000 five hundred and twelve
thousand
603.000 six hundred and three
thousand

For numbers between the thousands, say:

1,637 one thousand, six hundred and

thirty-seven
15,742 fifteen thousand, seven hundred and
forty-two
59,825 fifty-nine thousand, eight hundred and
twenty-five
500,032 five hundred thousand and thirty two
999,999 nine hundred and ninety-nine thousand,
nine hundred and ninety-nine

For 1,000,000 say one million or a million

46,000,000 forty-six million
792,000,000 seven hundred and
ninety-two million
§21. Numbers 199

For numbers between the millions, say:

2,364,572 two million, three hundred and sixty-four

thousand, five hundred and seventy-two

Higher numbers are usually estimated and written in words.

1.000. 000.000 one billion or a billion
or about a billion
around a billion
almost a billion
more than a billion
1.000. 000.000.000 a trillion

That company is worth billions of dollars.

The country is trillions of dollars in debt.

§21.2
FRACTIONS To read or say fractions of numbers, say:

y2 one-half or a half
314 three and a half
% two-thirds
6% six and two-thirds
% three-fourths or three quarters
4% four and three-quarters
3
/s three-fifths
2% two and three-fifths
5
/a five-eighths
5Vs five and five-eighths

To say fractions with measurements (see Measurement

Table in appendix), say:

14 cup half a cup or a half-cup or one half-cup

14 mile half a mile a half-mile one half-mile
% teaspoon two-thirds of a teaspoon
% yard three-quarters of a yard
5
/8 inch five-eighths of an inch
114 cups one and a half cups or a cup and
a half
314 cups three and a half cups
2% tea-
spoons two and two-thirds teaspoons
35/s yards three and five-eighths yards
200 Grammar §21.

§21.3
DECIMALS To read or say decimal numbers, say:
3.5 three point five or three and five-tenths
4.9 four point nine four and nine-tenths
6.75 six point seven five six and seventy-five
hundredths
8.32 eight point three two eight and thirty-two
hundredths

To talk about money, say:

a penny or one cent or a cent

a nickel five cents
a dime ten cents
a quarter twenty-five cents
a dollar bill a one or a single
a five-dollar bill a five
a ten-dollar bill a ten
three twenty-dollar bills three twenties

Amounts of money are expressed as follows:

$5.63 five dollars and sixty-three cents

$10.72 ten dollars and seventy-two cents
$564.03 five hundred and sixty-four dollars and three
cents
$3,729.17 three thousand, seven hundred and
twenty-nine dollars and seventeen cents
§22.
Days and Dates
What day is it?

The names of the days of the week are:

Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Saturday and Sunday are the weekend.

To tell the day of an event, use on:

When does your vacation start? It starts on Monday.
When are you leaving? I’m leaving on Tuesday.

What month is it?

The months of the year are:

January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December

To tell the month of an event, use in:

When does your vacation start? It starts in August.

When are you leaving? I’m leaving in September.

201
202 Grammar §22.

What’s the date?

To write the date, use month + cardinal number + comma

+ year:

November 23,1974

To say the date aloud, use an ordinal number—see §7.1-2.

the + ordinal number + of + month

or
month + ordinal number

It’s the 29th of March. It’s March 29th.

It’s the 1 st of May. It’s May 1 st.
It’s the 4th of July. It’s July 4th.
It’s the 31 st of December. It’s December 31 st.

To tell the date of an event, use on:

When does your vacation start? It starts on the 28th of
August.
When are you leaving? I’m leaving on September
3rd.

For a year, say:

1776 seventeen seventy-six
1852 eighteen fifty-two
1965 nineteen sixty-five
1999 nineteen ninety-nine

To tell the year of an event, use in:

When does your vacation start? It starts in 2007.
When are you leaving? I’m leaving in 2008.
§23.
Telling Time
To give the present time, when the time is exactly on the
hour, use:
It is + the hour + o’clock
or
It is + the hour + A.M. or P.M.
A.M. = in the morning
P.M. = in the afternoon, evening, or at night

What time is it?

It is one o’clock. or It is one A.M.
It is two o’clock. It is two P.M.
It is seven o’clock. It is seven A.M.
It is eleven o’clock. It’s eleven P.M.
It is noon. It’s twelve P.M.
It is midnight. It’s twelve A.M.

When the time is before or after the hour, use:

the digital form: It is + the hour + the number of minutes
past the hour
or
the traditional form: It is + the number of minutes after the
hour or the number of minutes before
the hour

What time is it?

Digital Form Traditional Forms
one-oh-five. It’s five after one. It’s
two-ten. It’s ten after two. It’s
three-fifteen. It’s fifteen after three. It’s
It’s a quarter after three. It’s
four-twenty. It’s twenty after four. It’s
five-twenty-five. It’s twenty-five after five. It’s
six-thirty. It’s six-thirty. It’s
seven-thirty-five. It’s twenty-five to eight. It’s
eight-forty. It’s twenty to nine. It’s
nine-forty-five. It’s fifteen to ten. It’s
It’s a quarter to ten. It’s
ten-fifty. It’s ten to eleven. It’s
eleven-fifty-five. It’s five to twelve. It’s

203
204 Grammar §23.

To give the time of a future event, use at+ the time:

What time is the concert? It’s at eight o’clock. It’s at
8:00 P.M.
What time is the party? It’s at seven-thirty.
What time does the class
start? It starts at five-fifteen.
What time are we leaving? We’re leaving at 6:00 A.M.

To emphasize an exact time, use on the dot or sharp:

What time does the class It starts at five-fifteen on
start? the dot.
What time are we leaving? We’re leaving at 6:00 A.M.
sharp.
§24.
Talking About the Weather
To tell present weather conditions, use:

It’s + adjective

How’s the weather? It’s nice.

It’s pleasant.
It’s dreary.
It’s sunny.
It’s cloudy.
It’s rainy.
It’s foggy.
It’s hot. (See temperature chart
in appendix)
It’s warm.
It’s cool.
It’s chilly.
It’s cold.
It’s freezing.
It’s windy.
It’s humid.

When there is precipitation at the moment, use

It’s + present participle

It’s raining.
It’s snowing.
It’s sleeting.
It’s hailing.

Extreme weather events include the following:

What is happening?
There is lightning. (a flash of electricity in the sky)
There is thunder. (the loud noise after lightning)
It’s a storm. (a strong wind with rain, snow, or hail,
or thunder and lightning)
It’s a gale. (a strong wind)
It’s a hurricane. (violent winds over 75 miles per hour)

205
206 Grammar §24.

It’s a cyclone. (a violent storm moving around a cen-

ter of low pressure, which also moves)
It’s a tornado. (a violent, destructive wind)
It’s a flood. (a flow of water over land that is usually
dry)
It’s an earthquake. (a shaking or sliding of the ground
caused by changes underneath)
LET’S REVIEW
Test Yourself

§1.
Letters and Words
1. Fill in the blanks to identify the following items:
a. Today, fast, happily, and here are examples
of .
b. Tall, new, red, and pretty are
c. Mon., Sept., ch., Mr., and Mrs. are
d. I, he, him, them, us, and her are
e. a, e, i, o, and u are .
f. went, gone, have, and sing, are
g. for, out, by, and to are
h. I, m, t, and s are .
i. but, so, and, and however are
j. nurse, town, and books are

2. Write the abbreviations for the following:

a. medical doctor .
b. the title of a married woman
c. and so forth .
d. the degree of a dentist
e. that is .
f. doctor of laws .
g. Robert Runyon, whose father has the same
name .
h. in the morning .
i. for example .
j. the business title of a woman

209
210 Let’s Review §2.

§2.
Capitalization
3. Write capital letters where necessary:
a. mr. jones is from Canada.

b. do you think i am john’s brother?

c. he was born on tuesday, the 5th of february.

d. my good friend carol is from new york, but she

lives in Washington, d. c.

e. California, michigan, and texas are all states of

the united states of america.
 Test Yourself 211

§3.
Punctuation
4. Punctuate the following sentences, and write capital
letters where necessary:
a. here comes miss phillips our new secretary

b. where are the computer discs

c. soo young bought three tables a sofa and two

chairs

d. i need the following things paper pencils a stapler

and some staples

e. mrs johnson doesn’t have a book so she is using

marys
212 Let’s Review
§4.

§4.
Sentences
5. Underline the subject in the following sentences:
a. John and James are here.
b. My friends play tennis.
c. Her brother likes swimming and diving.
d. Swimming and diving are fun.
e. It is nice to see you.

6. Underline the predicate in the following sentences:

a. John and James are here.
b. My friends play tennis.
c. Her brother likes swimming and diving.
d. He swims and dives every day.
e. Swimming is fun.

7. Underline the complement in the following

sentences:
a. Mary is my sister.
b. She seems tired today.
c. The tests look difficult.
d. Are you sure?
e. I don’t want to get sick.

8. Underline the direct object in the following

sentences:
a. Susan called Mary yesterday.
b. I love candy and flowers.
c. We need money.
d. Do you have friends here?
e. He bought three tickets.

9. Underline the indirect object in the following

sentences:
a. He gave her the money.
b. Did you tell us to go home?
c. We are going to show you the presents tomorrow.
d. David sent Mary a letter.
e. I told them the secret.
§5. Test Yourself 213

§5.
Nouns
10. Write the piural forms of the following nouns:
a. girl __
b. series
c. tomato
d. person
e. city
f. leaf
g. box
h. piano
i. child
j. man

11. Write the names of the non-count nouns:

a. tables, chairs, and beds
b. letters and postcards
c. tools and supplies
d. nickels, dimes, and quarters
e. necklaces, bracelets, and rings
f. facts of interest
g. notes, sounds, and songs
h. cleaning and dusting
i. assignments for after school
j. suggestions of help

12. Choose the correct noun to fill in the blank:

a. I need a .
ring rings jewelry
b. She wants three .
ring rings jewelry
c. They need a few
money dollars dollar
d. I made a little .
money dollars dollar
e. He spoke to each
children girls child
f. We have some .
friend friends neighbor
g. Both are nice.
sisters brother daughter
214 Let’s Review §5.

h. They made an
car appointments appointment
i. He doesn’t have any
friend sister brothers
j- She has many
friends sister family
k. Give them every
box boxes
1. They have too much
chairs tables furniture
m. We have too many
chairs table furniture

13. In each sentence, rewrite the noun in parentheses,

and make it plural if necessary:
a. I drank two (coffee) before lunch.
b. They grow a lot of (coffee) in
Colombia.
c. She served (chicken) and french
fries for dinner.
d. She raises (chicken) on her farm.
e. He wears (glass) for reading.
f. i would love a (glass) of water.
g. Are these cups made of (glass) ?
h. I used a lot of (paper) when I
wrote that (paper) on the economy.

14. Identify and capitalize the proper nouns:

a. They left in july.
b. We are going next friday.
c. Her birthday party is at her sister charlotte’s new
house.
d. Do you want to vist the white house when you
are in Washington?
e. Mr. and mrs. harrison live in new york city.
f. They lived in the state of louisiana before.
g. You have to cross an old bridge to get across old
creek.
§5- Test Yourself 215

15. Combine each pair of sentences into one, using an

appositive:
a. Mary is John’s wife. She is a doctor.

b. I like Barbara. She is my new neighbor.

c. You should call Jack. He is the computer expert.

d. The market has fresh vegetables. The market is

our favorite place to shop.

e. Carolyn is the best singer in the choir. She is my

sister.

16. Write the possessive form of the noun in the

following sentences:
a. A house that the Harrises own is the
house.
b. Dresses that Sally has are
dresses.
c. The cars that my friends have are
cars.
d. The money that the people have is
money.
e. A book that James has is
book.

17. Rewrite the following to show possession:

a. My friend has a mother.

b. The book has a name.

c. The school has an address.

d. My friend has an address.

e. The team has a captain.

f. The country has a president.

g. The suit has a color.

h. The teacher has a name.

216 Let’s Review §5.

i. The cat has a leg.

j. The table has a leg.

k. Sayed has a leg.

18. Use more, less, or fewer to combine each pair of

sentences into one:
a. I have five books. You have three books.

b. She has four rings. Her friend has two rings.

c. I have a lot of information. He has a little

information.

d. They have little money. We have some money.

19. Use the same to combine each pair of sentences

into one:
a. He has three pencils. She has three pencils.

b. My shoes are size six. Your shoes are size six.

c. This turkey weighs twenty pounds. That turkey

weighs twenty pounds.

d. Your husband is six feet tall. My husband is six

feet tall.

e. This fabric is four yards long. That fabric is four

yards long.

f. A man is here to see you. He was here before.

§6. Test Yourself 217

§6.
Pronouns
20. Change the underlined nouns to subject pronouns:
a. Angela was here yesterday.

b. Ken and Sharon walked home.

c. Amy and Tracy told us about the movie.

d. Tom really liked it.

e. Tom and I are going out tomorrow night.

21. Fill in the blanks with the correct impersonal

pronouns:
a. I am new in town. Where do
buy school supplies here?
b. Oh, sell them at the drugstore.
c. At the drugstore? Do sell
hardware there, too?
d. Yes, do.
can buy sewing supplies
there, too!
e. can buy a lot of things at
the drugstore!

22. Change the underlined nouns to object pronouns:

a. We are buying the basket for Marilyn.

b. She told Sally and me that she liked the basket.

c. I’m not sending David the pictures.

d. I’d rather send the pictures to his mother.

e. She always calls me and my husband when

she’s here.
218 Let’s Review §6-

23. Change the underlined nouns to pronouns:

a. Janice and Cheryl liked Doug’s car.

b. Please give the tickets to Joel.

c. Tony wanted to buy the ring for Patricia.

d. These hats are Bonnie’s and Judy’s.

e. Joe hurt Joe on Joe’s way to Christina’s house.

24. Use reciprocal pronouns to combine each pair of

sentences into one sentence:
a. Jim likes Ellie. Ellie likes Jim.

b. Matt helps Paul. Paul helps Matt.

c. Lisa called William. William called Lisa.

d. Brian promised Miriam. Miriam promised Brian.

25. Write the correct pronouns in the blanks:

a. (My friend and I) are
tired. Please give a drink
of water.
b. Thank you for helping my friend and .
c. I saw (James and Judy)
at the football game.
d. (James) was watching
the game, but (Judy)
wasn’t.
e. (Judy) and I began to talk.
f. Later, I told goodbye,
and I waved to too.
both waved back to

g. (David) called me last

night and told that
— - was coming to study
with .
h- I told that
could come to my
house at 8 o’clock, and that he should bring
book.
§6- Test Yourself 219

i. (Sandra and Cheryl) Sandra and

are sisters.
j. They don’t live near , but
they talk to on the phone
every day.
k. Cheryl said that had
talked to sister for two
hours yesterday.

26. Write in the correct reflexive or intensive pronouns:

a. Who made your dress?
I did. I made it .
b. Who went with Julie?
Nobody. She went .
c. Nobody can help him; he needs to help

d. I can’t get back in the store because the door

locked behind me.
e. If you want a birthday party, why don’t you plan it
?

27. Write in the correct possessive pronouns:

a. This dish belongs to Pat and Sam. It is

b. That pizza is Joe’s. It is

c. Those sandwiches are Patricia’s. They are

d. You brought the cake. It is

e. Peter and I made the apple pie. It is _
f. Cecil gave me this plate. It is

28. Rewrite the sentences using “belong to”:

a. That’s Jan’s purse.

b. This is our car.

c. Those are the neighbors’ flowers.

d. Which coat is yours?

220 Let’s Review
§6.

29. Complete the following with the correct relative

pronouns:
a. She is a girl. She sold us the cookies.
Who is she? She is the girl
sold us the cookies.
b. I bought the cookies. They had chocolate icing.
Which cookies did you buy? I bought the ones
had chocolate icing.
c. I paid the man. He is standing over there.
Who(m) did you pay? The man
I paid is standing over there.
d. He is a man. His daughter sold us the cookies.
Who is he? He is the man
daughter sold us the cookies.

30. Match each pronoun with its meaning:

too many a. a small amount
neither b. not one or the other
another c. a large number
few d. more than is good
either e. not one person
someone f. a small number
somewhere g. one place
not anyone h. one person
a few i. one or the other
a lot j. not enough
a little k. one more

31. Choose another, the other, others, or the others to

complete the following:
a. New York is a big city. There are many
b. New York is a city in the east. Washington is

c. Do you know any of ?

d. There are two New Yorks. One is a city, and
is a state.
§6- Test Yourself 221

32. Fill in the blanks with the correct pronoun from the
list on the right:
a. There are no people here. There another
isn’t in the store. something
b. I hear a voice, is anybody
in the store. one
c. I can’t find my watch anywhere
nothing
d. I hope I find it each
e. We can’t find. to eat. someone
f. I need to eat anything
9 The box is empty. There is
-
somewhere
in it.
h. She is a doctor, and I am _
too.
i. He ate two cookies. Now he wants

j. We gave tickets to all the participants.

has a ticket.
222 Let’s Review
§7.

§7.
Adjectives
33. Choose a, an, the, or no article (0) for the following;
a. She is artist.
b. We are friends.
c. That is book 1 sent you.
d. Those are not flowers 1 sent you
e. New York is big city.
f. That is interesting question.
g- That is interesting information.
h. He sends me flowers every day.
i. Can you give me advice?
j- He is big boy now.

34. Choose 0 or the before the following proper nouns:

a. Joann a. Chile
b. September h. Clarks
c. Philippines i. Atlantic Ocean
d. India i- University of
e. United States Michigan
f. Wednesday k. Mrs. Martin
I. Western
Hemisphere

35. Choose 0 or the to fill in the blanks correctly:

a. The student is on his way to school now.
b. Peter is going to jail to visit his friend.
c. I didn’t go to work today.
d. I stayed at home.
e. I always eat dinner by myself.
f. She had dinner at that restaurant
last night,
9-
last week was last week of our
vacation.
§7- Test Yourself 223

36. Express the following ordinal numbers in words:

a. 1st
b. 3rd
c. 8th
d. 12th
e. 16th
f. 22nd
g- 34th
h. 45th
i. 67th
j- 99th

37. Fiil in the blanks with the correct possessive

adjectives:
a. That’s my brother’s book. It’s book.
b. Mary says it’s hers. She says it’s
book.
c. No, it isn’t hers; it’s ours. I say it’s
book.
d. Maybe it belongs to Mark and Patty. Maybe it’s
book.
e. You are all wrong. It’s mine. See, it has
name inside the front cover.

38. Choose the correct noun determiner in the following

sentences:
a. I need jewelry.
a a little a few
b. She wants bracelets.
a a little a few
c. They need money.
a lot a lot of a few
d. I made dollars.
another a few any
e. He spoke to children.
all of the every each
f. We have neighbor.
some a few one
g. He doesn’t have neighbors.
a few any one
h. She bought new chairs.
another any three
i. He has friends.
many too many too much
j. I have homework.
many too many too much
224 Let’s Review §7.

39. Choose this, that, these, or those to fill in the blanks

correctly:
a. ring I am wearing was my mother’s.
b. I gave him shirt he has on.
c. Are dresses over there on sale?
d. I can’t find information you sent me.
e. My feet hurt. I need to take shoes
off.
f. I came here because shop is my
favorite.

40. Write in the correct proper adjectives:

a. He is a citizen of the United States. He is an
citizen.
b. She is from Italy. She is
c. That is the flag of Mexico. It is the
flag.
d. This wine is from France. It is wine.
e. Her shoes were made in Spain. They are
shoes.

41. Choose the correct adjective in the following

sentences:
a. I bought a box.
jewelry earring earrings
b. My sister works at a store.
dresses curtains shoe
c. The book was so that I got
and fell asleep.
boring bored
d. We were because the show was

fascinating fascinated
e. The dress was expensive; it was a
dress.
three-hundred-dollar three-hundred-dollars
f. Her husband is big; he is a athlete.
six-foot, two-hundred-pound
six-feet, two-hundred pounds
§7. Test Yourself 225

42. Provide the correct adjective form in each sentence:

a. This hat is (elegant) of all.
b. Those are (nice) houses in the
neighborhood.
c. You have an (easy) assignment
than I.
d. Your teacher is (patient) than mine.
e. The weather is much (hot) than
last month’s.
f. She is a (good) player than her
sister.
g. Her dishes are (same) mine.
h. Her furniture is (different) mine.
i. The weather is getting (warm, gradually)

j. That movie is (bad) than the one

we saw last week.

43. Provide the correct form of the adjectives cheap or

expensive:
My shoes cost $20. Your shoes cost $30. Bob’s
shoes cost $30. Jane’s shoes cost $60.
a. My shoes are yours.
b. Your shoes are mine.
c. Bob’s shoes are yours.
d. Jane’s shoes are ours.
e. Jane’s shoes are of all.
f. My shoes are of all.

44. Write in the correct form of the adjectives light or

heavy:
Bobby weighs fifty pounds. Billy weighs fifty-five
pounds. Jimmy weighs fifty-five pounds. John
weighs sixty pounds.
a. Bobby is Jimmy.
b. Jimmy is Billv.
c. John is Jimmy.
d. John is of all.
e. Bobby is of all.
226 Let’s Review §7.

45. Put the adjectives in the correct order:

a. skirt.
yellow / long / beautiful / her
b. blouse
ugly / red / old / my
c. tie
lovely/his/silk/blue
d. coat
your / wool / new / nice
e. shoes
dirty / leather / old / those

46. Use else to express the following:

a. I don’t see another person.

b. We don’t need another thing.

c. We want to go to another place.

d. I think he is looking for another thing.

e. No other place will please him.

f. I can’t live with a different person.

§8. Test Yourself 227

§8.
Verbs—Introduction
47. Circle the correct word in the following definitions:
a. To indicate the time of the action of a sentence,
use the correct .
tense mood voice
b. To emphasize the subject of a sentence, use the

subjunctive mood
active voice
passive voice
c. To emphasize the object of the action, use the

subjunctive mood
active voice
passive voice
d. An infinitive is .
the basic form + ed
the basic form + ing
to + the basic form
e. To find a verb in the dictionary, look for the

infinitive present tense basic form

48. Write the present participle form of each of the

following verbs:
a. cry f. sleep
b. freeze g. whip
c. bring h. choose
d. die i. study
e. shop j. occur

49. Write the past participle form of each of the following

verbs:
a. try f. dance
b. permit 9 sew
-

c. agree h. clean
d. fold i. play
e. ship j- study
228 Let’s Review §9.

I?:
Verbs—Present Time
50. Fill in the blanks with the correct present tense form
of be:
a. They fine.
b. She beautiful.
c. No. There (not) any spoons.
d. I from New York.
e. It _ Mary’s book.
f. We the secretaries.
9 The car
- in the parking lot.
h. Their parties _ on Sundays.
i. Her new dress purple.
j- No, John (not) my brother.

51. Write a question for each of the previous statements.

a.
b. _
c. ___
d. ~
e.
f. '
9 -

h. __
i.
j-

52. Answer the following questions with a positive short

form:
a. Are you well?

b. Is he happy?

c. Are they here?

d. Is she alone?

e. Are we late?

f. Is it O.K.?
§9. Test Yourself 229

g. Am I your friend?

h. Is there a telephone here?

i. Are there any good restaurants near here?

j. Is it cold?

53. Answer the following questions with a negative short

answer:
a. Are you well?

b. Is he happy?

c. Are they here?

d. Is she alone?

e. Are we late?

f. Is it O.K.?

g. Am I your assistant?

h. Is there a telephone here?

i. Are there any good restaurants near here?

j. Is it hot?

54. For each of the following statements, write a

response that shows you are surprised:
a. We are sisters.

b. He isn’t hungry.

c. She is asleep.

d. They aren’t at home.

e. I’m not tired.

f. You are beautiful.

230 Let’s Review §9.

g. He is my boyfriend.

h. She isn’t married.

§9.1-2
The Present 55. Write the he / she / it form of the following verbs:
Tense— a. have He
b. go Mr. Jones
Other Verbs c. laugh He
d. come It
e. cry Billv
f. take She
g. sing Miss Ortiz
h. do Jessica
i. work it
j. love He

Write the negative forms for the following:

a. have Kim
b. go Larry
c. laugh Lisa
d. come It
e. cry She
f. take He
g. do Ms. Martin
h. work he
i. exercise she

Write a surprised response to the following

statements:
a. 1 don’t have a car.

b. She doesn’t like me.

c. We love it here.

d. He needs help.

e. They don’t live here anymore.

§9* Test Yourself 231

58. Rewrite the following sentences, putting the time

words in the correct place:
a. We go to the movies on Saturdays, (usually)

b. We eat dinner, (at eight o’clock)

c. He helps us. (often)

d. He helps us. (sometimes)

e. He helps us. (on the weekends)

f. She takes trips, (occasionally)

g. I wear a bathing suit, (in the summer)

h. They visit me. (rarely)

i. I call them, (always, at night)

j. She studies, (never, in the afternoon)

k. He exercises, (every day, at six o’clock)

I. We exercise, (often, in the morning)

59. Write a question that is answered by the underlined

word in each of the following sentences:
a. We like Peggy.
?

b. We call Peggy.
?

c. Peggy is our friend.

?
d. We take her to the zoo.
?

e. We take her to the zoo.

?
f. We see animals.
?
g. They smell bad.
?
232 Let’s Review §9.

60. Write a question that is answered by the underlined

word in each of the following sentences:
a. I have six cousins.
?

b. They live here now.

?
c. They eat a lot.
?
d. My aunt cooks chicken.
?
e. My aunt cooks chicken.
?

f. My cousins eat a lot of chicken.

?
g. My aunt buys the chicken at the market.
?
h. She usually shops on Saturdays.
?

61 Fill in the blanks with the correct verb form:

a. They (go) to the movies on
Saturdays.
b. We (like) chocolate ice cream.
c. No, he (live/not) here.
d. No, I (have/not) a car.
e. She (work) at the bank.
f. My friend and I usually (meet) in
the library.
g. Sylvia (leave) _ home at 6 o’clock,
h. She (watch) television every
evening.

62. Write a question for each of the previous statements.

a. ?
b. ?
c. ?

d. _?
e. ?

f. ?
?
g-
h. ?
§9- Test Yourself 233

§9.1-3
PresentTense 63. Express the following, using modals:
Modals a. You are able to sing.

b. You don’t know if your friend is at home.

c. You give your employee permission to go home.

d. You ask someone to help you carry a package.

e. You ask for advice about calling a doctor.

f. You advise a friend to go to the doctor.

g. You are required to work.

h. Your friend does not need to work.

i. You warn your friend not to make noise.

j. You prefer to live in the city.

64. Fill in the blanks to complete the following:

a. Can you dance?
Yes, I .
b. Can your sister play the piano?
Yes, she .
c. Can your brothers sing?
No, they .
d. Where is Mike?
I don’t know. He sick.
e. Where are Debbie and Scott?
I don’t know. they are lost.
f. May we go home now, Miss Gibbs?
Yes, you .
g. May Johnnie go home, too?
No, he .
h. You look sick. I think you stay home.
You work when you are sick.
It is very important for me to work. I
work today.
i. No, you . Your boss says you
work today.
Yes, but my boss pay my bills.
234 Let’s Review §9.

j. You are very sick. The doctor says you

work when you are sick.
k. Geoff isn’t here yet. He is usually on time. He
in a traffic jam.
L. I want to order a salad. What you
to eat?
I never eat salad. I have
a sandwich than a salad.

§9.2
PRESENT 65 Write in the present progressive form of each verb in
the following sentences:
PROGRESSIVE
a. He (sleep) at present.
TENSE b. She (study) at the moment.
c. We (paint) the living room this week.
d. They (drive) home now.
e. I (relax) this month because I am on
vacation.
f. you (enjoy) your vacation?

66. Make the sentences negative:

a. He (sleep) at present.
b. She (studv) at the moment.
c. We (paint) the living room this week.
d. They (drive) home now.
e. 1 (relax) this month because 1 am not
on vacation.

67. Rewrite the sentences using the present progressive

tense:
a. Mark continues to be asleep.

b. Joe calls me a lot and I am annoyed.

c. Heather doesn’t work now, as before.

d. George doesn’t study here now, as before.

e. Sam studies here now, as before.

§9. Test Yourself 235

68. Choose between the present tense and the present

progressive tense in the following expressions:
a. He (like) movies.
b. We (eat) at 6:30 every night.
c. They (watch) TV right now.
d. She always (wash) the dishes after
dinner.
e. I (write) this exercise.
My mother can’t help you; she (talk)
on the telephone.
9 I (want)
-
my dinner now.
h. They (have) a party in that room.
They (have) a lot of money now.
My sister isn’t here; she (study) at
the library.
I (think) he’s nice.
I (think) about him now.

69. Choose the present tense or the present progressive

tense to fill in the blanks in the following paragraph:
I am a kindergarten teacher, and I would like to tell
you about my class. The children always (come)
a. to school ready for fun and games.
Cindy, for example, (enjoy) b. the toys in
the corner right now. At the moment, she and Mary
(play) c. with the blocks. They (talk)
d. about their favorite colors. Cindy (like)
e. blue, and Mary (like) f.
red. Cindy (stay) g. with a babysitter this
year, and she rarely (play) h. with other
children. At home she (be) i.. quiet, and
she never (invite) j. friends to her house.
Another child is Bobby. He (paint) k. a
picture this morning. He (use) I. all
the colors in the box, and (make) m.
a beautiful present for his mother. At home, he
always (watch) n. TV. Look! There (be)
o. Jennifer. She (jump) p.
rope with her friend, Kathy. They (have) q.
a good time.
236 Let’s Review §9-

$9 4
PRESENT 70. Write the present perfect form of each verb:
PERFECT a. We live.
b. They eat.
TENSE c. He sleeps.
d. She cries.
e. You come.
f. We go.
g. I work.
h. We write.
i. You study.
j. She reads.

71. Change the following present tense verbs to the

present perfect:
a. I don’t change.
b. He doesn’t break anything.
c. She doesn’t win.
d. You don’t promise, do you?
e. He doesn’t help, does he?

72. Choose since or for to fill in the blanks in the

following sentences:
a. I have lived here 1988.
b. They have been our neighbors
twelve years.
c. He has worked there a long time.
d. I have been waiting five o’clock.
e. They have been talking midnight.

73. Write a question for each of the statements in the

preceding question.
§9. Test Yourself 237

74. Write a sentence using the present perfect tense to

give a reason for each of the following facts:
a. She knows how to drive this car.

b. I know where your house is.

c. We know every scene in that movie.

d. They are not hungry.

e. He is very hungry.

75. Use the present perfect tense to express the following:

a. My goal is to walk six miles. I need to walk two
more miles.

b. My plan is to lose twenty pounds in total. I need

to lose ten more pounds.

c. My budget allows me to spend $100 in total. I

have $25 left.

d. My assignment is to write three papers. I need to

write one more.

76. Fill in the blanks with the correct present perfect verb
form:
a. We (work) here for two years.
b. They (help) him for a long time.
c. I (eat/not) dinner yet.
d. She (be) in Alaska twice.
e. He (play/never) football before.
f. I (answer) 20 questions today so far.
g. She is walking in the door right now. She (arrive)

77. Write a question for each of the previous statements.

a. ?
b. ?
c. ?
d. ?
e. ?
f. ?
g- ?
238 Let’s Review §10.

§10.
Verbs—Past Time
Fill in the blanks with a past form of be:
a. 1 sick.
b. We in Las Vegas.
c. No, they (not) late.
d. She my favorite teacher.
e. It 5:30 P.M.

79. Write a question for each of the previous statements.

a. ?
b. ?

80. Write the past tense forms of the following verbs:

a. stand k. bend
b. try 1. fold
c. work m. hold
d. study n. know
e. see o. show
f. agree p. hear
g. teach q. wear
h. buy r. sell
i. bring s. tell
i. ao t. do

Fill in the blanks with the correct past tense verb

form:
a. We (begin) this morning at ten
o’clock.
b. 1 (stop) at six o’clock.
c. Mary (help) me yesterday.
d. No, he (go/not) to Spain last summer.
e. They (go) home two hours ago.
f. No, we (eat/not) at my friend’s house
last night.
g. My brother and 1 (leave) home at
seven o’clock.
h. No. Vicki and Joan (call/not) me today.
§10. Test Yourself 239

i. Yes, I (have) a good time at the party.

j. She (cry) when he left.

82. Write a question for each of the previous statements.

a. ?
b. ?
c. ?
d. ?
e. ?
f. ?
9 -
?
h. ?
i. ?
?
j-

83. Choose the correct tense—the present perfect or the

past—to complete the following sentences:
a. I am studying. I (start) to study fifteen
minutes ago. I (study) for fifteen
minutes.
b. We live in this house. We (move)
here in 2004. We (live) since 2004.
c. Nancy (meet) _ Sharon in college,
They (know) each other for twelve
years.
d. When they were in college, they (do) ______
a lot of things together.
e. They (work) at the bookstore, they
(take) the same classes, and they
(live) in the same dormitory.
f. Now, they live in different cities, and they (not,
see) each other for a long time.

84. Change the following sentences from the present to

the past:
a. I can work.

b. Should we go?

c. They may take a vacation. (They have permission.)

d. He may be sick. (It is possible that he is sick.)

e. He must work there. ( He probably works there.)

f. She has to study.

240 Let’s Review §10.

85. Express the following using past tense modal

auxiliaries:
a. I wasn’t able to go.

b. They probably played all day.

c. He was required to be there.

d. I advised you to do it.

e. Maybe she went.

§10.2
PAST 86. Fill in the blanks with the past progressive verb form:
PROGRESSIVE a. I went to bed at 10:00 P.M. and woke up at 6:00
A.M. At 2:00 A.M. I (sleep) .
TENSE b. Margaret sat down to eat at 6:00 P.M. The door-
bell rang at 6:05, when Margaret (eat)
dinner.
c. Jason rode his bike yesterday afternoon; Adam
watched TV yesterday afternoon. While Jason
(ride) his bike, Adam (watch)
TV.
d. My sister called her friend on the telephone this
morning and they talked all day. I tried to call at
noon, but the line was busy. My sister (talk)
to her friend.

87. Choose the past tense or the past progressive tense

to fill in the blanks:
a. While you were watching TV, I (sew)
in my room.
b. While I (sew) , I (think)
about our argument.
c. I (be) upset, because you (seem)
to be so angry.
d. I (want) to scream, but I (begin)
to cry instead.
e. When you (come) in my room, I (cry)
because I (think) you
(love, not) me anymore.
§10. Test Yourself 241

88. Choose the correct tense—the past progressive or

the past—to complete the following paragraph:
Last week, while I (drive) a. to work,
I (see) b. an accident. A woman (wait)
c. at a traffic light. When the light (turn)
d. green, her car (stall) e. .
The driver in back of her (not, pay attention)
f. , and his car (run) g. into
the back of hers. It (make) h. a loud
crash. The woman (get) i. out of her car
and (start) j. to yell at the man. She (still,
yell) k. at him when I (drive) I.
away.

89. Choose the correct tense—the past progressive or

the past—to complete the following paragraph:
Last night, while I (cook) a. dinner, I
(burn) b. my finger. I (be) c.
scared, so I (go) d. to the emergency
room at the hospital. The nurse (tell) e.
me to wait. I (wait) f. _______ for two hours.
Finally, they (call) g. my name and I (go)
h. to a small room. I (wait) i.
there another hour. While I (sit) j. there I
(hear) k. a lot of noises from other
rooms, and I (see) I. several people on
stretchers. One patient (get) m. medi-
cine throught an IV tube. I (be) n. tired
and I (fall) o. asleep. When the doctor
(come) p. in, I (sleep) q. . He
(wake) r. me up. Then he (look) s.
at my finger. He (put) t.
some cream on it and (say) u. it was
O.K. Then the nurse (give) v. me a bill
and (tell) w. me to go home.
242 Let’s Review §io.

90. Use the past progressive to express the following:

a. I planned to go to the circus; I didn’t go because
I didn’t have enough time.

b. We planned to call you; we didn’t call you

because we didn’t have a quarter.

c. They planned to have a party; they didn’t have

the party because the teacher disapproved.

d. She planned to stay at home; she didn’t stay at

home because her friend invited her to the movies.

§10.3
USED TO... 91. Use used to to express the following:
a. I was fat before; I am not fat now.

b. We lived there before; we do not live there now.

c. He smoked before; he does not smoke now.

d. He was married before; he is not married now.

e. She was nice before; she is not nice now.

f. They were happy before; they are not happy now.

g. He laughed before; he does not laugh now.

h. We ate dinner together before; we do not eat

dinner together now.

§10.4
WOULD IN THE 92. Use would to express the following:
PASTTENSE a. She always told jokes.

b. She always made my favorite food.

c. He always helped me with my homework.

d. We always had lots of fun.

e. They never fought.

§10. Test Yourself 243

§10.5
PAST 93. Write the past perfect forms of the verbs to complete
PERFECT the following sentences:
a. 1 (help) before.
TENSE b. She (not / be) there before.
c. We (sing) that song many times
before.
d. He (go) to bed early that night.
e. They (eat) too much.
f. He (not / see) our new house yet.

94. Use the past perfect tense to give a reason for each
of the following statements:
a. She wasn’t hungry.

b. I was very hungry.

c. Joe knew how to drive that car.

d. Jeremy and his friends knew every scene in that

movie.

95. Combine each pair of sentences into one sentence.

Choose the past tense or the past perfect tense to
put the events in the correct order:
a. First, I didn’t read the newspaper. Second, I left
for the office.
When
b. At six o’clock, Sue ate dinner. At seven o’clock,
Joel invited her to go out.
When Joel
c. First, we called the gas station for help. Then my
dad saw us.
When
d. The dance started at eight o’clock. I arrived at ten
o’clock.
When
244 Let’s Review §10.

96. Choose the correct tense—the present perfect or the

past perfect—to complete the following sentences:
a. I am hungry because I (not/eat)
dinner.
I was hungry because I (not/eat)
dinner.
b. Barbara is tired because she (work)
all day.
Barbara was tired because she (work)
all day.
c. James cooked a big dinner because he (invite)
his friends to eat.
James is cooking a big dinner because he (invite)
his friends to eat.
d. We are staying an extra week in the city because
we (not/see) all the sights.
We stayed an extra week in the city because we
(not/see) all the sights.
e. Alison and David were worried about the exam
yesterday because they (not/study) .
Alison and David are worried about the exam
today because they (not/study) .

§10.6
PAST 9/ Change the past tense forms of the verbs to the past
perfect progressive forms:
PERFECT
a. She (wrote) a diary for a long time.
PROGRESSIVE b. He (lived) here for a long time.
TENSE c. She (hoped) to get married for a long
time.
d. We (thought) about that for a long time.
e. Henry and Roxanne (wanted) to have
a baby for a long time.

98. Use the past perfect progressive to express the

following:
a. We worked hard all day; we were exhausted.

b. They danced all night; they slept until noon.

c. She ate potato chips all day; she didn’t eat her
dinner.

d. He studied for six years; he was happy to get his

degree.
§11. Test Yourself 245

§11-
Verbs—Future Time
99. Write the present progressive form of the verbs in
the blanks:
a. 1 (leave) tomorrow.
b. She (come) next week.
c. He (study) at the university next
year.
d. We (watch) TV at eight o’clock.
e. They (not / go) home until later.

Write the going to form of the verbs in the blanks:

a. 1 (leave) tomorrow.
b. She (come) next week.
c. He (study) at the university next
year.
d. We (watch) TV at eight o’clock.
e. They (not/go) until later.

101. Indicate a 50 percent possibility of the following

events:
a. He (work) .
b. She (not / come) .
c. They (bring) their daughter.
d. We (take) that course.
e. You (not /need) a coat.

102. Indicate a 99 percent possibility of the following

events:
a. I (arrive) by morning.
b. They (finish) by May.
c. He (call) at ten o’clock.
d. The party (be over) by midnight.

103. Indicate a 90 percent possibility of the following

events:
a. He (graduate) in June.
b. They (get married) next fall.
c. She (stop working) soon.
d. The project (be finished) by next
year.
246 Let’s Review §11.

104. Indicate a 10 percent possibility of the following

events:
a. I (call) you tomorrow.
b. We (be) home until late.
c. They (tell) us their plans.
d. She (get married) again.

105. Promise the following:

a. I (call)
b. We (bring) cookies.
c. He (be) on time,
d. I (write) you a letter.

106. Predict the following:

a. Your son (pass) the course.
b. It (rain) tomorrow.
c. It (not / snow) tomorrow.
d. My mother (worry) about me.
e. She (win) the election.
f. They (get angry) .
g. He (change) everything.

107. a. Accept the following requests with a short

answer:
Will you help me?

Will you all pay attention, please?

b. Refuse the following requests with a short

answer:
Will you help me?

Will you give me your telephone number?

108. Supply the verb for the following scheduled events:

a. The movie (start) at seven
o’clock.
b. The train (leave) at 4:30.
c. The class (end) at 7:15.
d. The games (begin) tomorrow.
§11. Test Yourself 247

109. Use future modal auxiliaries to express the following:

a. I cannot drive yet. I soon.
b. He doesn’t have to study now, but he
in the future.
c. We can’t help you today, but we
tomorrow.
d. You may leave the room now, but you
after the test begins.
e. I want to travel to South America now, and I
in the future, too.

110. Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the verbs in
the following sentences:
a. He will get here before I (leave) .
b. I will leave after he (get here) .
c. She will leave before he (get here) .
d. He will get here after she (leave) .
e. I will be happy as soon as they (arrive) .
f. I might cry when they (say) goodbye.

111. Rewrite the following sentences using a future

expression to show the indicated meanings:
a. John is sick; there is only a 10 percent possibility
that he will go to work tomorrow.

b. I plan to study tomorrow.

c. I promise to help you next week.

d. We are almost home. There is a 99 percent

possibility that we will arrive at 3:00 P.M.

e. Teresa is scheduled to travel next week.

f. There is a 50 percent possibility that Ann will take

a vacation in August.

g. Arthur refuses to work in that place.

h. You predict rain for tomorrow.

i. There will be no need for her to return tonight.

j. After three months you are going to have the

ability to swim.
248 Let’s Review §11-

§11.5
FUTURE 112 Fill in the blanks with the future progressive forms of
PROGRESSIVE the verbs:
a. 1 (play) tennis at four o’clock.
TENSE b. He (prepare) his speech then.
c. She (run) the marathon that day.
d. We (make) a cake this afternoon
e. They (practice) tomorrow
evening.

113. Write a question for each of the statements in the

preceding question.
a. ?

b. ?
c. ?
d. ?

e. _____ ?

§11.6
FUTURE 114. Fill in the blanks with the future perfect forms of the
PERFECT verbs:
a. She (finish) the project by
TENSE September.
b. I (send) my tax forms by April
15th.
c. We (do) all our work before 6:30.
d. They (call) us by then.
e. He (move) to his new house
before November.
§12. Test Yourself 249

§12.
Verbs—Additional Patterns
115. Write the subjects or objects of the following
sentences as gerunds:
a. (Sing) is a lot of fun.
b. My cousin loves (travel) .
c. She is not afraid of (get lost) .
d. (Travel) makes her very happy.
e. I do not enjoy (drive) in traffic.
f. (Wait) makes me nervous.
g. I’ll have to quit (go) to work during
rush hour.
h. We can finish (talk) about this later.

116. Fill in the blanks with the correct verb form:

a. We will consider (go) to the beach.
b. They discussed (take) a trip to
Argentina.
c. I hope we finish (work) on that project
soon.
d. She admitted (tell) him my telephone
number.
e. He finally quit (smoke) .

117. Express the following using a gerund expression:

a. We want to bowl.

b. They like to fish.

c. He has to shop.

d. She hates to camp.

e. She wants to dance.

250 Let’s Review §12.

118. Use feel like to express the following:

a. What do you want to do now?

b. Do you want to go swimming?

c. No. I wanted to go swimming yesterday.

d. Today I want to dance.

119. Use the gerund form to very politely ask the following:
a. Take off your hat.

b. Save my seat.

c. Help us.

d. Lend me $100.

e. Take me home after the meeting.

120. Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the verb:
a. These rags are good for (clean) .
b. I am so tired of (drive) in traffic.
c. My new friend is crazy about (dance)
d. She never gives up; she keeps on (try)
e. Those boys are in (train) for the race.
f. They get in shape by (run) ten miles
a day.

121. Rewrite the sentences, changing the possessive

nouns to pronouns (§6.5):
a. They appreciated Susan’s coming.

b. She regrets Tim’s resigning.

c. She loves Steve’s dancing.

d. They don’t like their mother’s singing.

e. Jim’s cooking is pretty good.

§12. Test Yourself 251

122. Write the subjects or objects of the following

sentences as infinitives:
a. They can’t afford (lose) that money.
b. I need (learn) how to use the
computer.
c. (Manage) that would be great.
d. (Forget) my appointment would be a
mistake.
e. I didn’t mean (hurt) your feelings.
f. Allan promised (help) his co-workers.
g. We finally learned (use) the
computer.
h. Your friends appear (be) comfortable.
i. Brandon decided (study) at the
college.

123. Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the verb:
a. He says he can’t afford (buy) a
house.
b. I guess they decided (play) football.
c. Has she promised (marry) _______ you?
d. We intend (finish) studying first.
e. The children are begging (stay) home
today.
f. I planned (save) a little money this year.

124. Rewrite the sentences using the infinitive form of the

verb:
a. I need milk; I’m going to the store.

b. They are going to Aisha’s house; they want to

see her.

c. Melissa cannot lift that box; she is not strong

enough.

d. Danny can get his driver’s license; he is old

enough.

e. I drive home; the drive lasts twenty minutes.

f. Jackie cleans her room; she needs two hours.

252 Let’s Review §12.

g. I heard your good news; I am glad.

h. I heard your bad news; I am sorry.

125. Choose the correct form of the verb—the gerund,

the infinitive, or the basic verb—to express the
following:
a. Please stop (drive) so fast.
b. Please take a break; stop (talk) to me
for a minute.
c. Please help me (take) out the trash.
d. June tried (sleep) , but couldn’t.
e. She tried (take) pills to help her
sleep.
f. The boss let her (go) home early.
g. Mike’s mother makes him (get up)
early.
h. He used (wake up) every day at
eight; now he wakes up at six.
i. Now he is used to (wake up) at six.

126. Choose the gerund, the infinitive, or the basic verb to

complete the following sentences:
a. I hope you don’t mind (help) us.
b. They decided (postpone) the picnic.
c. Please help your brother (wash) the
car.
d. He claims (have) found the treasure.
e. He was sorry (learn) the truth.
f. She will deny (see) them.
g. They tried to make him (go) home.
h. She will refuse (talk) to us.
i. It took ten minutes (drive) here.
j. Her mother made her (clean) the
room.
k. How did you manage (find) this?
L. We really appreciate (hear) about
your trip.
m. Don’t forget (tape) the program.
n. Can you imagine (live) in that cold
climate?
o. We want to go (shop) .
p. What do you feel like (do) ?
q. He wants to keep on (work) .
r. I regret your (lose) the election.
§12. Test Yourself 253

127. Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the verb—
the gerund or the infinitive:
a. I enjoy (dance) with you.
b. He always forgets (call) me.
c. Al and Harry promised (write) letters.
d. She goes (shop) every day.
e. Let’s keep on (work) until midnight.
f. I intend (earn) more money.
g. Lynn and I need (find) a new
apartment.
h. Ask Martin (help) you.
i. I want my nephew (graduate) from
high school.
j. The students used (wear) jeans to
school.
k. The students are used (wear) jeans
to school.
L. Andy likes (listen) to music.

128. Punctuate the following sentences:

a. Molly asked Are you coming with us
b. Sam said I’m not going anywhere
c. I will wait here he told her
d. Then he added Don’t worry about me

129. Change the verbs from present to past to report the

following:
a. Molly said, “I am going to the store.”
Molly said she to the store.
b. Peter answered, “I want to go with you.”
Peter answered that he to go with
her.
c. She told him, “No, you can’t go this time.”
She told him that he go that time.
d. He cried, “I don’t want to stay here.”
He cried that he ______ to stay there.
e. “Do you want anything from the store?” she
asked.
She asked if he anything from the
store.
f. He said, “Will you bring me a new toy?”
He asked if she him a new toy.
254 Let’s Review §12.

130. Change the verbs from the past to the past perfect to
report the following:
a. Molly said, “I went to the store.”
Molly said that she to the store.
b. Peter said, “I wanted to go with you.”
Peter said that he to go with her.
c. “What did you do while I was gone?” she asked.
She asked him what he while she
was gone.
d. He told her, “I played with my toys while you were
gone.”
He told her that he with his toys while
she was gone.
e. “What did you bring me?” he asked.
He asked her what she him.

131. Change the following direct quotes to reported

speech:
a. “Martha is clever,” said Steve.

b. “Jessica wants ice cream,” said Mrs. Adams.

c. “We can’t swim,” yelled the children.

d. “They didn’t do it right,” reported the lady.

e. “I’m not going to drive,” said Jerry.

f. “Is Sam going to work?” asked Joan.

g. “Have they finished yet?” asked the reporter.

h. “When are they going to finish?” he asked later.

i. “Where did she go?” asked Dad.

132. Change the following reports to direct quotes:

a. Ralph said he was going home.

b. Judy asked him if he was tired.

c. Ralph told her that he was exhausted because

he had been working all day.
§12. Test Yourself 255

d. Judy replied that he deserved a rest.

e. Ralph asked how many hours she had worked.

f. Judy replied that she had worked eight hours.

g. She said she thought she would go home, too.

133. Rewrite the following questions beginning with Do

you know..
a. Where is her house?

b. Why is she leaving?

c. Where does Monica live?

d. Where did Freddy buy that hat?

134. Answer the following questions with / don’t know +

the included question:
a. Who is that lady?

b. When is the party?

c. Where are the buses?

d. What does Katrina do?

e. Why did they go home?

135. Restate the following questions beginning with Can

you tell me + the included question:
a. Where is the president’s office?

b. Who is her boyfriend?

c. Where Main Street is?

d. What time is it?

e. When did they get here?

256 Let’s Review
§12.

f. Why did they leave?

g. When are you going to begin?

136. Use the infinitive form to answer the included

question in the following sentences:
a. Do you know where we should go?
No, I don’t know
b. Can you tell me how I can get to the station?
Yes, I can tell you _
c. Will you find out who(m) we should call for
information?
Yes, I will find out
d. Do you know when I should leave for the airport?
No, I don’t know

137. Add a tag question to each of the following

sentences:
a. He is adorable.

b. We aren’t finished.

c. She is afraid.

d. They are cold.

e. You like ice cream.

f. He wants a drink.

g. I haven’t been there.

h. You have performed already.

i. He hasn’t called us.

j. He was there.

k. You went to the game.

I. He tried to help you.

m. They didn’t like the dessert.

§12. Test Yourself 257

n. He hadn’t seen the movie.

o. She had been working all day.

138. Arrange the following words into sentences, using

object pronouns wherever possible:
Indirect Direct
Subject Verb Object Object
a. David gives Helen money
b. Helen draws David pictures
c. Sandra mentioned Larry party
d. Robin asked Sally question
e. Paul explains the students lessons
f. Richard built his wife house

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
258 Let’s Review §13.

§13.
Verbs—Special Usage
139. Use get + an adjective to express “become” in the
following sentences. Be sure to put get in the correct
tense:
a. If I am late, my father will angry.
b. I don’t want my mother to worried.
c. She is not old, but she is gray.
d. My father isn’t old either, but he is
bald.
e. If you run around in circles, you will
dizzy.
f. Don’t excited, but I think we are
a new car.
g. Ann cold, so I brought her home.
h. Brenda and Pete married last July.

140. Use have + a past participle to express the following:

a. Somebody else is going to cut my hair.

b. Somebody else cuts our grass every week.

c. Somebody else changes his oil regularly.

d. Somebody else irons his shirts for him.

e. Somebody else cleaned her house last week.

f. Somebody else repaired the damage last year for

us.

g. Somebody else is going to paint our house next

week.
§13. Test Yourself 259

141. Write in the correct verb to complete each of the

following sentences:
a. Please Barbara if she is coming home.
ask ask for
b. Please three tickets.
ask ask for
c. Will you me some money?
borrow lend
d. How much do you want to from me?
borrow lend
e. I’m you to me $100.
asking asking for borrow lend

142. Write in the correct verb to complete each of the

following sentences:
a. I to my mother every day.
speak talk
b. She ______ only Russian.
speaks talks
c. The president is going to on
television tonight.
speak talk
d. He to his friends at the reception last
night.
spoke talked

143. Write in the correct verb:

a. The meeting is here at my house. Please
(go/come) to my house at two o’clock
and (take/bring) a cake. When you
leave, be sure to (take/bring) your
plate.
b. O.K. I will (go/come) to your house
and (take/bring) a cake. When I
leave, I won’t forget to (take/bring)
my plate.
c. The next meeting is at Janet’s house. I’m not
(going/coming) , are you?
d. Yes, I’m (going/coming) , but I’m not
(taking/bringing) anything. Janet
never (takes/brings) anything to my
house.
260 Let’s Review §13.

144. Write in the correct verb:

a. Don’t anything to Mickey.
say tell
b. him that it’s a secret.
Say Tell
c. Mickey always our secrets to everybody.
says tells
d. He it’s very important to
says tells say tell
the truth.

145. Write in the correct verb:

a. We have to our homework.
do make
b. My brother will some exercises with you.
do make
c. He never mistakes.
does makes
d. While he helps you your homework,
do make
I will you a sandwich.
do make

146. Write in the correct verb:

a. I you were here now.
hope wish
b. I you can come tomorrow.
hope wish
c. I you could come tomorrow.
hope wish
d. I you would win yesterday.
hoped wished
e. I you had won yesterday.
hope wish

147. Write in the correct verb:

a. The girls are some old family photographs.
looking at watching
b. Our cousins are some old family movies.
looking at watching
c. Beth beautiful today.
looks like looks
d. She certainly her mother.
looks like looks
e. They really .
look like look alike
§14. Test Yourself 261

§14.
Verbs—Passive Voice
148. Change the following sentences from the active
voice to the passive voice:
a. Nobody understands me.

b. Everybody loves that teacher.

c. They make these rugs in Iran.

d. They care for her.

e. People call him a lot.

f. Somebody is helping them.

149. Change the following sentences from the active

voice to the passive voice:
a. Nobody understood me.

b. Everybody loved that teacher.

c. They made these rugs in Iran.

d. They cared for her.

e. People called him a lot.

f. Somebody was helping them.

g. Somebody wrote this poem in 1865.

262 Let’s Review §14.

150. Change the following sentences from the active

voice to the passive voice:
a. Nobody has understood me.

b. They have cared for her.

c. People have called him a lot.

d. Somebody has helped them.

e. Somebody has robbed the bank on the corner.

§15. Test Yourself 263

§15.
Verbs—Imperative Mood
151. Express the following using the command form:
a. Tell someone to call you.

b. Tell John to send you a letter.

c. Tell your mother not to leave.

d. Tell Erin not to drive fast.

e. Suggest dancing with you to Pat.

f. Suggest going to a movie with you to a friend.

g. Tell your friend you don’t want to argue with him.

h. Suggest to your friend that you and he not play

tennis today.

152. Use the impersonal you to ask for the following

information:
a. You want to know how to start a machine.

b. You want to know how to get to Center Street.

c. You want to know where people park.

d. You want to know how much people have to pay

to ride on the metro.

e. You want to know where people can mail letters.

264 Let’s Review §15.

153. Change the following commands to the impersonal

you forms:
a. Put your money in the slot. Push the start button.

b. Go straight ahead. Turn left.

c. Park on the street.

d. Mail letters at the post office.

154. A teacher needs help in cleaning up her classroom.

Express what she wants from her students:
a. “Adam, erase the blackboard.”
She wants .
b. “Jessica, pick up the toys.”
She wants .
c. “Amy and Lisa, put away the crayons.”
She wants .
d. “David and Brian, put the chairs in place.”
She wants .
e. “Reza, put the trash in the wastebasket.”
She wants .

155. What did the teacher want her students to do in the

preceding question? Use object pronouns in your
answers:
a. What help did she want from Adam?

b. What help did she want from Jessica?

c. What help did she want from Amy and Lisa?

d. What help did she want from David and Brian?

e. What help did she want from John?

§16. Test Yourself 265

§16.
Verbs—Subjunctive Mood
156. Express the following using subjunctive forms:
a. I want him to be quiet.
I suggest .
b. She wants us to be responsible.
She insists .
c. He wants her to be careful.
He demands .
d. I want you to come home.
I insist .
e. She wants him to get a tutor.
She recommends .

157. Combine each pair of sentences into one sentence,

beginning with / wish:
a. I don’t have a ticket. I want a ticket.

b. He doesn’t go to school. I want him to go to

school.

c. She works on weekends. I don’t want her to work

on weekends.

d. We don’t have any money. We want money.

e. They leave their dirty dishes in the sink. I don’t

want them to do that.

158. Combine each pair of sentences into one sentence,

beginning with / wish:
a. They went home early. I regret that.

b. You called me at 6:00 A.M. I regret that.

c. She quit her job. I regret that.

d. He found out the truth. I regret that.

e. We didn’t tell him in time. I regret that.

266 Let’s Review §16.

159. Combine each pair of sentences into one sentence,

beginning with If:
a. I don’t have a lot of money. I want to take a trip to
Europe.

b. She isn’t here. I want to dance with her.

c. He doesn’t have a diploma. He can’t get a job.

d. We are not lucky. We want to win the lottery.

160. Combine each pair of sentences into one sentence,

beginning with If:
a. I didn’t have a lot of money. I wanted to take a
trip to Europe.

b. She wasn’t here. I wanted to dance with her.

c. He didn’t have a diploma. He couldn’t get a job.

d. We were not lucky. We wanted to win the lottery.

161. Use the indicative after if to restate the following

sentences:
a. Every time I walk, I get tired.
If .
b. Whenever he reads, he falls asleep.
If .
c. When she drinks milk, she gets a stomachache.
If .
d. Whenever he is awake, he watches TV.
If .

162. Use the indicative after if to restate the following sen-

tences, showing probable action and certain result:
a. I expect to go home early; my wife will be happy.
If .
b. I will probably get a vacation in August; I will go to
Asia.
If
§16. Test Yourself 267

c. He will probably marry her; he will move to

California.
If .
d. They will probably buy that house; they will make
a beautiful garden.
If .
e. We expect to move in February; we will give you
our furniture.
If .

163. Rewrite the following sentences, changing the

probable action to improbable action:
a. If I go to the beach, I will buy a bathing suit. I
don’t think I’m going to the beach.
If .
b. If she buys that dress, she will have to lose ten
pounds. I don’t think she is going to buy that
dress.
If .
c. If he wins the lottery, he will buy a fabulous new
car. I don’t think he is going to win the lottery.
If .
d. If we take a trip around the world, we will visit
you. I don’t think we are going to take a trip
around the world.
If .
e. If they get married, they will have a lot of prob-
lems. I don’t think they are going to get married.
If .
268 Let’s Review §17.

§17.
Prepositions
164. Write in the correct prepositions:
Where is the star?

a. the box

★
b. the box

c. the box

d. the box

e. the box

f. the box

165. Write in the correct prepositions:

a. Washington, D.C. is the United States.
b. It is the capital the United States.
c. Our house is Springfield.
d. It is Oak Street.
e. It is number 1432.
§17. Test Yourself 269

166. Write in the correct prepositions.

Where is the dotted line going?

a. the box

b. the box

: V

c. the box

d. the box

167. Write in the correct prepositions:

a. Her son was born 1995, April,
the 15th, three o’clock
the morning.
b. Betty hasn’t been here ______ January 14th.
c. We haven’t seen her three weeks.
d. We are leaving 4:00 on the dot, so be
here 3:55.
e. Frances is going to stay June 15th. She
will stay ten days.
f. We always go to a restaurant my birthday.
g. Do you ever go out night?

168. Write in the correct prepositions:

a. Why are you a hurry?
I want to be time for work.
b. Do you want to come my car?
Thanks. I usually ride the bus.
Now I will get to work time to have a
cup of coffee.
270 Let’s Review §17.

169. Write in the correct prepositions:

a. What are you looking ?
I’m trying to find my glasses so I can look
these photographs.
Then I need to look some telephone
numbers.
b. Have you looked top of your desk?
c. Look the drawer. Maybe they are
there.

170. Write in the correct prepositions:

a. My mother made the dress; it was made
her.
b. It is my dress; she made it me.
c. She made it _____ her sewing machine, but
she did the embroidery hand.
d. John gave me a present; the present is
John.
e. He bought the jewelry Colombia; the
jewelry is Colombia.
f. It was made Colombia. It is made
gold.
g. They went to Hawaii plane.
h. I didn’t go with them; they left me.
i. They left National Airport.

171. Complete the questions that the following

statements answer:
a. I went to the movies with Marty. Who/m ?
b. She is thinking about her trip. What ?
c. They live on Maple Street. What street ?
d. He lives in Chicago. What city ?
e. We talked to everybody there. Who/m ?

172. Write in the correct preposition:

a. She is very good tennis.
b. Fruit is very good your health.
c. Her husband is very good her.
d. She is very good young children.

173. Fill in the blanks with the correct prepositions:

a. I am good shape.
b. We met chance.
c. He is going to be television.
d. She is always a bad mood.
e. They love to walk the rain.
§17. Test Yourself 271

f. a little luck, we will meet.

g. The fire truck came because the woods were
fire.
h. I rode _ _ the bus.
i. He rode the car.
j. Jeans are always style.
k. Do you do your homework home, or
school?

174. Fill in the blanks with the correct prepositions:

a. She is excited her vacation.
b. Are you prepared the test?
c. They are really involved their business.
d. You have been absent _ class three
times.
e. I think she is capable better work.
f. She is finally finished her assignment.
9 Are you scared
*
wild animals?
h. We were very grateful them for helping
us.
i. We were very grateful the help.
j- I am sorry that.
k. They were very disappointed him.
He was absent school for six days.

175. Fill in the blanks with the correct prepositions:

a. I dreamed you last night.
b. Let me tell you my family.
c. Stop staring me!
d. He always takes advantage others.
e. Do you agree me?
f. She has applied six colleges.
g. We can count him.
h. He is devoted her.
i. Are you finished this table?
j. I want to thank you all your help.
k. Is she participating this election?

176. Replace the words in parentheses with a verb +

preposition combination:
a. Please (be careful) .
b. I (went to sleep) .
c. I hope they (escaped)
d. Maybe he will (appear unexpectedly)
e. He (does nothing) all day.
f. (Do not enter) !
272 Let’s Review §17.

g. She will have to (begin again)

h. You can (register) at the desk.
i. They (live in harmony)
j. Please (discover the answer)
k. What time do you (arise) in the
morning?
L. Please don’t (stop trying)

177. Change the underlined objects to pronouns and

write each complete sentence in the correct order:
a. Please throw the trash away.

b. Are you going to pay Jim back?

c. I wrote down your telephone number.

d. We will look into the problem.

e. You need to hand in the reports.

f. May I try on the dress?

g. I had to ask for the number.

h. She had to clean up the mess.

i. He tried to do the work over.

j. She likes to pick out her own clothes.

k. They ran out of staples.

I. We will have to call our customers back.

m. Try to get over your anger.

n. They called off the picnic.

o. Do you think you can catch up with Tom and Ed?

§18. Test Yourself 273

§18.
Adverbs
178. Replace the words in parentheses with an adverb:
a. Please come (to this place) .
b. He is not at home. He is (in another place)
on business.
c. I can’t find my glasses (in any place) .
d. Have you looked (on the next floor up) ?
e. Yes. I have looked (in that place) and
(on the floor below) , too. I have looked
(a distance above) and (a distance
below) . I have looked (in all places)

f. They are probably (below) something.

179. Replace the words in parentheses with an adverb:

a. Please don’t come (after the expected time)

b. I saw him three years (before now)

c. He’s going to come (the week after the present week)

d. I hope he calls me (a short time after now)

e. I haven’t seen him (a short time before now)

f. He doesn’t come to class (now, as before)

g. Is he (now, as before) studying?

180. Replace the words in parentheses with an adverb:

a. What are you going to do (today at night)

b. I’m going to the library (after now)

c. (After that) I’m going to get

something to eat, and (after that)
I’m going home.
274 Let’s Review §18.

181. Fill in the blanks with the correct time expressions:

a. (The present day) is the 18th of May.
b. was the 17th.
c. The 16th was .
d. is the 19th.
e. The 20th is .

182. Fill in the blanks with the time expression that indi-
cates the part of the day:
a. It is 7:00 P.M. The weather has been changing all
day. at 6:00 A.M. it was sunny.
b. It began to rain at one o’clock .
It stopped at 3:00 P.M.
c. Then it began to rain again at six .
I sure hope it stops before eleven tonight.

183. Write in the correct time expressions:

a. It is June. My co-workers and I are planning our
vacations. Joe already took his vacation
month, (in May)
b. Cara is away week, and Melissa
plans to go away month, (in July)
c. I guess I will take off Friday (the day
after tomorrow) and all of week.
d. I didn’t get a vacation year.

184. Fill in the blanks to indicate the number of times:

a. The phone only rang (one time)

b. Maybe the caller will try (one more time)

c. People usually let the phone ring at least six

d. I always try to pick it up after it rings (two times)

185. Match the following adverbs with their meanings:

a. sometimes 0 percent of the time
b. always 5 percent of the time
c. hardly ever 25 percent of the time
d. never 60 percent of the time
e. usually 80 percent of the time
f. frequently 100 percent of the time
§18. Test Yourself 275

186. Write in the adverbs that correspond to the following

adjectives:
a. good
b. careful
c. fast
d. quick
e. easy
f. hard
g. busy
h. able
i. late
j. responsible
k. early
L. bad
m. slow
n. better than
o. slower than
p. faster than
q. easier than
r. worse than
s. more careful than
t. quieter than
u. less capable than
v. the most responsible
w. not as easy as
x. not as good as

187. Fill in the blanks to complete the following ideas:

a. My air-conditioner only cools the room to
79 degrees. It works.
b. My neighbor’s air-conditioner cools the room to
65 degrees. It works.
c. Another neighbor’s air-conditioner cools the room
to 72 degrees. It works .
d. The engineer is working on mine now. It is almost
fixed. He says it works.

188. Match the expressions with their meanings:

a. fairly good excellent
b. not too good bad
c. rather good average
d. extremely good better than average
276 Let’s Review §18.

189. Answer the following questions with complete

sentences, making sure the adverbs are in the
correct position:
a. Where are you going? (outside)

b. When is he going to New York? (tomorrow)

c. Are they sleeping? (Yes, still)

d. Have you finished? (Yes, already)

e. Have you finished? (No, yet)

f. Does she take lessons? (No, not as before)

g. How often does she practice? (seldom)

h. When do they play? (usually, in the afternoon)

i. When does your friend call? (sometimes, in the

evening)

j. How does he paint? (very well)

k. How tall is John? (pretty tall)

§19. Test Yourself 277

§19.
Conjunctions
190. Add conjunctions to combine the indicated words:
a. June Joyce were singing
dancing.
b. I want one dessert: ice cream cake.
c. Geoff likes chocolate not vanilla.
d. Joel was angry calm.
e. Laura Kevin made two trips; they
went to Nashville, to
New Orleans.
f. We have room for one more thing: a table
a cabinet.
g. I want both. I want a table a cabinet.
h. George was tired, ______ he went home
early.
i. George went home early, Josh
stayed until iate.
j. Josh stayed, he was having a
wonderful time.

191. Combine each pair of sentences into one sentence,

using too or either:
a. Kathleen is happy. Glenn is happy.

b. Jack works hard. Mike works hard.

c. Emily left yesterday. Jeremy left yesterday.

d. Val was cooking. Renee was cooking.

e. Sue isn’t tired. Joel isn’t tired.

f. Kevin didn’t come. Scott didn’t come.

g. Carolyn wasn’t driving. Bob wasn’t driving.

h. We didn’t see them. Gayle didn’t see them.

278 Let’s Review §19.

192. Rewrite the sentences you wrote in the preceding

questions, using so or neither:
a. ?
b. ?
c. ?
d. ?

e. ?
f. ?

g. — ?
h. ?

193. Write in the correct conjunction pairs:

a. I want two desserts. I want cheese-
cake apple pie.
b. He is very talented. He plays the
piano the trombone and the
saxophone.
c. She is not very musical. She plays
sings.
d. She made her children take music lessons,
they wanted them .
e. They had to study an instrument: the
piano the guitar.

194. Fill in the correct subordinating conjunctions:

a. We went to the movies at 10:00 P.M. We washed
the dishes at 9:00 P.M.
We washed the dishes we went to
the movies.
b. They left at 6:00 P.M. We got there at 6:30.
We got there they left.
They didn’t wait we arrived.
c. She was sleeping from one until three. I was
sleeping from one until three.
she was sleeping, I was sleeping.
d. He has graduated from college. We are going to
celebrate.
We are going to celebrate he has
graduated from college.
e. She got a driver’s license. Now she can drive.
She got a driver’s license she could
drive.
f. They were very hungry. They didn’t eat anything.
they were hungry, they didn’t eat
anything.
§19. Test Yourself 279

g. He bought a ticket early. He didn’t want to risk

missing the concert.
He bought a ticket early risk missing
the concert.
h. She is nervous. She is singing well.
She is singing well she is nervous.
280 Let’s Review §20.

§20.
Discourse Markers
195. Choose from the following discourse markers to
complete the sentences:
after after that then finally first
second meanwhile
a. To operate this machine, , put your
clothes in.
b. add the detergent and close the lid.
c. select the water temperature and
wash time.
d. push the starter knob in, turn it to the
right to the cycle you prefer, and pull it to start.
e. , go do something else.
f. about thirty minutes, when the wash-
ing machine has stopped, remove the clothes
from the machine.
g. , put the clothes in the dryer or hang
them on a line.

196. Choose from the following expressions to complete

the sentences:
and as well as in addition plus besides
furthermore on top of that moreover
a. I think we should buy this house. It is close to the
city the metro.
b. , the neighborhood is beautiful.
c. there are a lot of shops within
walking distance.
d. , it is less expensive than some
smaller houses we have seen.
e. , we will have room for our future
children.
§20. Test Yourself 281

197. Complete each sentence with a statement that

reflects the message of the underlined words:
a. Yes, I know Carol; as a matter of fact.

b. This dinner is delicious; indeed.

c. I enjoyed the party last night; actually.

198. Choose from the following expressions to complete

the sentences:
but however on the other hand in contrast
nevertheless still instead otherwise
a. She’s a nice girl. Her sister, , is a pain
in the neck.
b. He must like you a lot; , he wouldn’t
call you so often.
c. He’s always tired when he gets home. ,
he helps with the housework.
d. It’s an interesting job, , it doesn’t pay
very much.
d. She didn’t like the blue dress, so she bought the
red one .

199. Choose from the following expressions to complete

the sentences:
that is for example specifically I mean
in other words
a. He’s having a lot of trouble keeping up with the
rest of the class; , he should repeat
the course.
b. I need to go out—to the movies, to a concert, or
to a restaurant,
c. I need to go out; , to the concert on
Saturday night.
d. The movie was great; , really terrific.
e. There are 25 prizes; , one for each
child.
282 Let’s Review §20

200. Choose the best expression for each sentence:

a. They didn’t invite him to the party, but he went
(anyway / after all) .
b. I don’t always agree with the boss, but I do what
he tells me to do; (anyhow / anyway / after all)
, he’s the boss.
c. She can paint the kitchen red if she wants to;
(anyhow / after all) , it’s her kitchen.
d. We can’t decide whether to rent an apartment or
buy a house. (In any case / After ail) ,
we don’t have to decide until next spring.

201. Choose from the following expressions to complete

the sentences:
although even though even if
a. He can read and write, he’s only four
years old.
b. We will play the game tomorrow, it
rains.
c. They played last night, it rained.
d. He wouldn’t accept that job they paid
him a million dollars.

202. Choose from the following expressions to complete

the sentences:
in the end in short in summary in conclusion
a. In spite of all their problems they got
married and moved away.
b. We have to plan, organize, economize, and
cooperate in order to do better. , we
have to try harder.
c. They went swimming, they played ball, they
made a lot of new friends, and they went to new
places. , they had a wonderful time.
d. It was a good year for the company. ,
I would like to tell you all how much I enjoyed
working with you this year.
§21 Test Yourself 283

§21.
Numbers
203. Write the following numbers as they should be read
or said:
a. 64

b. 377

c. 4,541

d. 20,302

e. 400,001

f. 6,000,312

g. 614 miles

h. 13/4 acres

i. $10.34

j. $5,428.21

k. $10,000,000
284 Let’s Review §22.

§22.
Days and Dates
204. Answer the following questions in complete
sentences:
a. What day is before Friday?

b. What day is between Tuesday and Thursday?

c. What are Saturday and Sunday?

d. What month is before September?

e. What month is after March?

f. When is Independence Day in the United States?

§23. Test Yourself 285

§23.
Telling Time
205. Write the times shown on the following clocks:
286 Let’s Review §24.

§24.
Talking About the Weather
206. Match the words in Column A with the meanings in
Column B:

Column A Column B
a. 75 degrees hot weather
b. lightning cold weather
c. a flood pleasant weather
d. 35 degrees a circular storm
e. thunder winds over 75 miles per hour
f. hurricane a flow of water over usually dry land
g. 95 degrees a loud noise
h. cyclone electricity in the sky
 Test Yourself 287

Review Exercise
207. Answer the following questions in complete
sentences:
a. What time is it?

b. What are you doing?

c. How do you feel?

d. Why do you feel that way?

e. How many questions have you answered?

f. What are you going to do after you finish this

test?

g. What were you doing at 9 o’clock this morning?

h. Where were you then?

i. What time did you arrive there?

j. Who was there when you arrived?

k. What was she or he doing?

I. How long had she been there?

m. What time did you eat lunch yesterday?

n. Had you had breakfast?

o. How did you feel when you got home yesterday?

p. Why did you feel that way?

q. Did you finish all the tests?

r. Are you proud of yourself? You should be!

Answers
1. a. adverbs
b. adjectives
c. abbreviations
d. pronouns
e. vowels
f. verbs
g. prepositions
h. consonants
i. conjunctions
j. nouns

2. a. M.D.
b. Mrs.
c. etc.
d. D.D.S.
e. i.e.
f. LL.D.
g. Robert Runyon, Jr.
h. A.M.
i. e.g.
j. Ms.

3. a. Mr. Jones is from Canada.

b. Do you think I am John’s brother?
c. He was born on Tuesday, the 5th of February.
d. My good friend, Carol, is from New York, but she
lives in Washington, D.C.
e. California, Michigan, and Texas are all states of
the United States of America.

4. a. Here comes Miss Phillips, our new secretary!

b. Where are the computer discs?
c. Soo Young bought three tables, a sofa, and two
chairs.
d. I need the following things: paper, pencils, a
stapler, and some staples.
e. Mrs. Johnson doesn’t have a book, so she is
using Mary’s.

288
 Answers 289

5. a. John and James

b. My friends
c. Her brother
d. Swimming and diving
e. It

6. a. are
b. play
c. likes
d. swims and dives
e. is

7. a. my sister
b. tired
c. difficult
d. sure
e. sick

8. a. Mary
b. candy and flowers
c. money
d. friends
e. three tickets

9. a. her
b. us
c. you
d. Mary
e. them

10. a. girls
b. series
c. tomatoes
d. people
e. cities
f. leaves
g. boxes
h. pianos
i. children
j. men

11. a. furniture
b. mail
c. hardware
d. change
e. jewelry
290 Let’s Review

f. information
g. music
h. housework
i. homework
j. advice

12. a. ring
b. rings
c. dollars
d. money
e. child
f. friends
g. sisters
h. appointment
i. brothers
j. friends
k. box
L. furniture
m. chairs

13. a. coffees
b. coffee
c. chicken
d. chickens
e. glasses
f. glass
g. glass
h. paper paper

14. a. July
b. Friday
c. Charlotte’s
d. White House, Washington
e. Mr. and Mrs. Harrison, New York City
f. Louisiana
g. Old Creek

15. a. Mary, John’s wife, is a doctor.

b. I like Barbara, my new neighbor.
c. You should call Jack, the computer expert.
d. The market, our favorite place to shop, has fresh
vegetables.
e. Carolyn, the best singer in the choir, is my sister.
 Answers 291

16. a. Harrises’
b. Sally’s
c. my friends’
d. the people’s
e. James’s

17. a. my friend’s mother

b. the name of the book
c. the address of the school
d. my friend’s address
e. the captain of the team or the team’s captain
f. the president of the country
g. the color of the suit
h. the teacher’s name
i. the cat’s leg or the leg of the cat
j. the leg of the table
k. Sayed’s leg

18. a. I have more books than you do. / You have

fewer books than I do.
b. She has more rings than her friend does. / Her
friend has fewer rings than she does.
c. I have more information than he does. / He has
less information than I do.
d. They have less money than we do. / We have
more money than they do.

19. a. They have the same number of pencils.

b. Our shoes are the same size.
c. These turkeys are the same weight.
d. Our husbands are the same height.
e. These fabrics are the same length.
f. The same man is here to see you.

20. a. She
b. They
c. They
d. He
e. We

21. a. you
b. they
c. they
d. they You
e. You
292 Let’s Review

22. a. her
b. us it
c. him
d. them her
e. us

23. a. They his

b. them him
c. He it her
d. theirs
e. He himself his her

24. a. Jim and Ellie like each other.

b. Matt and Paul help each other.
c. Lisa and William called each other.
d. Brian and Miriam promised each other.

25. a. We us
b. me
c. them
d. He she
e. She
f. her him They me
g. He me he me
h. him he his
i. she
j. each other each other
k. she her

26. a. myself
b. by herself
c. himself
d. itself
e. yourself

27. a. theirs
b. his
c. hers
d. yours
e. ours
f. mine
 Answers 293

28. a. That purse belongs to Jan.

b. This car belongs to us.
c. Those flowers belong to the neighbors.
d. Which coat belongs to you?

29. a. who
b. that
c. who(m)
d. whose

30. dbkjihgefca

31. a. others
b. another
c. the others
d. the other

32. a. anybody
b. Someone
c. anywhere
d. somewhere
e. anything
f. something
g. nothing
h. one
i. another
j. Each

33. a. an
b. 0
c. the
d. the
e. a
f. an
g. 0
h. 0
i. 0
j. a

34. a. 0
b. 0
c. the
d. 0
e. the
f. 0
9- 0
294 Let’s Review

h. the
i. the
j. the
k. 0
L. the

35. a. 0
b. the
c. 0
d. 0
e. 0
f. 0 0
g. 0 the

36. a. the first

b. the third
c. the eighth
d. the twelfth
e. the sixteenth
f. the twenty-second
g. the thirty-fourth
h. the forty-fifth
i. the sixty-seventh
j. the ninety-ninth

37. a. his
b. her
c. our
d. their
e. my

38. a. a little
b. a few
c. a lot of
d. a few
e. all of the
f. one
g. any
h. three
i. many
j. too much
 Answers 295

39. a. This
b. that
c. those
d. that
e. these
f. this

40. a. American
b. Italian
c. Mexican
d. French
e. Spanish

41. a. jewelry
b. shoe
c. boring bored
d. fascinated fascinating
e. three-hundred-dollar
f. six-foot, two-hundred-pound

42. a. the most elegant

b. the nicest
c. easier
d. more patient
e. hotter
f. better
g. the same as
h. different from
i. warmer and warmer
j. worse

43. a. cheaper than / less expensive than

b. more expensive than
c. as expensive as / as cheap as
d. more expensive than
e. the most expensive
f. the cheapest

44. a. lighter than

b. as light as
c. heavier than / not as light as
d. the heaviest
e. the lightest
296 Let’s Review

45. a. her beautiful long yellow

b. my ugly old red
c. his lovely blue silk
d. your nice new wool
e. those dirty old leather

46. a. I don’t see anyone else.

b. We don’t need anything else.
c. We want to go someplace else.
d. I think he is looking for something else.
e. No place else will please him.
f. I can’t live with anyone / anybody else.

47. a. tense
b. active voice
c. passive voice
d. to + the basic form
e. basic form

48. a. crying
b. freezing
c. bringing
d. dying
e. shopping
f. sleeping
g. whipping
h. choosing
i. studying
j. occurring

49. a. tried
b. permitted
c. agreed
d. folded
e. shipped
f. danced
g. sewed
h. cleaned
i. played
j. studied

50. a. are
b. is
c. aren’t / are not
d. am
e. is
 Answers 297

f. are
g. is
h. are
i. is
j. is not / isn’t

51. a. How are they?

b. What is she like?
c. Are there any spoons?
d. Where are you from?
e. Whose book is it?
f. Who are you?
g. Where is the car?
h. When are their parties?
i. What color is her new dress?
j. Is John your brother?

52. a. Yes, I am.

b. Yes, he is.
c. Yes, they are.
d. Yes, she is.
e. Yes, you are.
f. Yes, it is.
g. Yes, you are.
h. Yes, there is.
i. Yes, there are.
j. Yes, it is.

53. a. No, I’m not.

b. No, he isn’t / he’s not
c. No, they aren’t / they’re not
d. Not, she isn’t / she’s not
e. No, you aren’t / you’re not
f. No, it isn’t / it’s not
g. No, you aren’t / you’re not
h. No, there isn’t / there’s not
i. No, there aren’t
j. No, it isn’t / it’s not

54. a. You are?

b. He isn’t?
c. She is?
d. They aren’t ?
e. You aren’t?
f. I am?
g. He is?
h. She isn’t?
298 Let’s Review

55. a. has
b. goes
c. laughs
d. comes
e. cries
f. takes
g. sings
h. does
i. works
j. loves

56. a. doesn’t have

b. doesn’t go
c. doesn’t laugh
d. doesn’t come
e. doesn’t cry
f. doesn’t take
g. doesn’t do
h. doesn’t work
i. doesn’t exercise

57. a. You don’t?

b. She doesn’t?
c. You do?
d. He does?
e. They don’t?

58. a. We usually go to the movies on Saturdays.

b. We eat dinner at eight o’clock.
c. He often helps us.
d. Sometimes he helps us. / He helps us sometimes.
e. He helps us on the weekends.
f. She occasionally takes trips.
g. I wear a bathing suit in the summer.
h. They rarely visit me.
i. I always call them at night.
j. She never studies in the afternoon.
k. He exercises every day at six o’clock.
L. We often exercise in the morning.

59. a. Who likes Peggy?

b. Who(m) do you call?
c. Who is your friend?
d. Who takes her to the zoo?
e. Who(m) do you take to the zoo?
f. What do you see?
g. What smells bad?
 Answers 299

60. a. How many cousins do you have?

b. Where do they live now?
c. Who eats a lot?
d. What does your aunt cook?
e. Who cooks chicken?
f. How much chicken do they eat?
g. Where does she buy the chicken?
h. When does she usually shop?

61. a. go
b. like
c. doesn’t live
d. don’t have
e. works
f. meet
g. leaves
h. watches

62. a. What do they do on Saturdays? / Where do they

go on Saturdays?
b. What kind of ice cream do you like? / Do you
like chocolate ice cream?
c. Does he live here?
d. Do you have a car?
e. Where does she work?
f. Where do you and your friend meet?
g. What time does Sylvia leave home?
h. What does she do every evening? or When does
she watch television?

63. a. I can sing.

b. He may be at home. / He might be at home. /
Maybe he is at home.
c. You may go home.
d. Will (would, could) you help me carry this
package?
e. Should I call a doctor?
f. You should go to the doctor.
g. I have to work.
h. She (He) doesn’t have to work.
i. You mustn’t make noise.
j. I would rather live in the city.
300 Let’s Review

64. a. can
b. can
c. can’t / cannot
d. might / may
e. Maybe
f. may
g. may not
h. should shouldn’t have to
i. don’t don’t have to doesn’t have to
j. mustn’t
k. must be
L. would like would rather

65. a. is sleeping
b. is studying
c. are painting
d. are driving
e. am relaxing
f. are enjoying

66. a. isn’t sleeping

b. isn’t studying
c. aren’t painting
d. aren’t driving
e. I’m not relaxing

67. a. Mark is still sleeping.

b. Joe is always calling me.
c. Heather isn’t working anymore.
d. George isn’t studying here anymore.
e. Sam is still studying here.

68. a. likes
b. eat
c. are watching
d. washes
e. am writing
f. is talking
g. want
h. are having
i. have
j. is studying
k. think
L. am thinking
 Answers 301

69. a. come
b. is enjoying
c. are playing
d. are talking
e. likes
f. likes
g. is staying
h. plays
i. is
j. invites
k. is painting
L. is using
m. making
n. watches
o. is
p. is jumping
q. are having

70. a. have lived

b. have eaten
c. has slept
d. has cried
e. have come
f. have gone
g. have worked
h. have written
i. have studied
j. has read

71. a. haven’t changed

b. hasn’t broken
c. hasn’t won
d. haven’t promised, have
e. hasn’t helped, has

72. a. since
b. for
c. for
d. since
e. since

73. a. How long have you lived here?

b. How long have they been your neighbors?
c. How long has he worked there?
d. How long have you been waiting?
e. How long have they been talking?
302 Let’s Review

74. a. She has driven this car before.

b. I have been to your house before.
c. We have seen that movie before.
d. They have already eaten.
e. He hasn’t eaten.

75. a. I have (already) walked four miles.

b. I have lost ten pounds (so far).
c. I have (already) spent $75.
d. I have (already) written two papers.

76. a. have worked

b. have helped (have been helping)
c. have not eaten
d. has been
e. has never played
f. have answered
g. has just arrived

77. a. How long have you worked (have you been

working) here?
b. How long have they helped (have they been
helping) him?
c. Have you eaten dinner yet?
d. Has she ever been in Alaska? / Has she been in
Alaska before? / How many times has she been
in Alaska?
e. Has he ever played football? / Has he played
football before?
f. How many questions have you answered so far?
g. Has she arrived yet?

78. a. was
b. were
c. weren’t
d. was
e. was

79. a. How were you?

b. Where were you?
c. Were they late?
d. Who was she?
e. What time was it?
 Answers 303

80. a. stood
b. tried
c. worked
d. studied
e. saw
f. agreed
g. taught
h. bought
i. brought
j. went
k. bent
L. folded
m. held
n. knew
o. showed
p. heard
q. wore
r. sold
s. told
t. did

81. a. began
b. stopped
c. helped
d. didn’t go
e. went
f. didn’t eat
g. left
h. did not call
i. had
j. cried

82. a. What time did you begin? / When did you

begin?
b. What time did you stop? / When did you stop?
c. When did Mary help you? / Who helped you? /
Who(m) did Mary help?
d. Did he go to Spain last summer?
e. What time did they go home?
f. Did you eat at your friend’s house last night?
g. What time did you leave home?
h. Did Vicki and Joan call you today?
i. Did you have a good time at the party?
j. What did she do when he left?
304 Let’s Review

83. a. started have studied / have been studying

b. moved have lived / have been living
c. met have known
d. did
e. worked took lived
f. have not seen

84. a. I could work.

b. Should we have gone?
c. They were allowed to take a vacation. / They
could have taken a vacation.
d. He may have been sick. / He might have been
sick. / Maybe he was sick.
e. He must have worked there.
f. She had to study.

85. a. I couldn’t go.

b. They must have played all day.
c. He had to be there.
d. You should have done it.
e. She might have gone. / She may have gone.

86. a. was sleeping

b. was eating
c. was riding was watching
d. was still talking

87. a. was sewing

b. was sewing was thinking
c. was seemed
d. wanted began
e. came was crying thought didn’t love

88. a. was driving

b. saw
c. was waiting
d. turned
e. stalled
' f. was not paying attention
g. ran
h. made
i. got
j. started
k. was still yelling
L. drove
 Answers 305

89. a. was cooking

b. burned
c. was
d. went
e. told
f. waited
g. called
h. went
i. waited
j. was sitting
k. heard
L. saw
m. was getting
n. was
o. fell
p. came
q. was sleeping
r. woke
s. looked
t. put
u. said
v. gave
w. told

90. a. I was going to go to the circus, but I didn’t have

enough time.
b. We were going to call you, but we didn’t have a
quarter.
c. They were going to have a party, but the teacher
disapproved.
d. She was going to stay home, but her friend
invited her to the movies.

91. a. I used to be fat.

b. We used to live there.
c. He used to smoke.
d. He used to be married.
e. She used to be nice.
f. They used to be happy.
g. He used to laugh.
h. We used to eat dinner together.

92. a. She would tell jokes.

b. She would make my favorite food.
c. He would help me with my homework.
d. We would have fun.
e. They would never fight.
306 Let’s Review

93. a. had helped

b. had not been
c. had sung
d. had gone
e. had eaten
f. had not seen

94. a. She had (already) eaten.

b. I hadn’t eaten (yet).
c. He had driven that car before.
d. They had seen that movie before.

95. a. When I left for the office, I hadn’t read the

newspaper (yet).
b. When Joel invited her to go out, Sue had
(already) eaten dinner.
c. When my dad saw us, we had already called the
gas station for help.
d. When I arrived at the dance, it had already started.

96. a. have not had not

b. has worked had worked
c. had invited has invited
d. have not seen had not seen
e. had not studied have not studied

97. a. had been writing

b. had been living
c. had been hoping
d. had been thinking
e. had been wanting

98. a. We were exhausted because we had been

working hard all day.
b. They slept until noon because they had been
dancing all night.
c. She didn’t eat her dinner because she had been
eating potato chips all day.
d. He was happy to get his degree because he had
been studying for six years.

99. a. am leaving
b. is coming
c. is studying
d. are watching
e. aren’t going
 Answers 307

100. a. am going to leave

b. is going to come
c. is going to study
d. are going to watch
e. are not going to go

101. a. He may work. / He might work. / Maybe he will

work.
b. She may not come. / She might not come. /
Maybe she won’t come.
c. They may bring / They might bring / Maybe they
will bring
d. We may take / We might take / Maybe we will
take
e. You may need / You might need / Maybe you
will need

102. a. should arrive

b. should finish
c. should call
d. should be over

103. a. will probably graduate

b. will probably get married
c. will probably stop working
d. will probably be finished

104. a. probably won’t call

b. probably won’t be
c. probably won’t tell
d. probably won’t get married

105. a. I will call.

b. We will bring
c. He will be
d. I will write

106. a. will pass

b. will rain
c. won’t snow
d. will worry
e. will win
f. will get angy
g. will change
308 Let’s Review

107. a. Yes, I will. Yes, we will,

b. No, I won’t. No, I won’t.

108. a. starts
b. leaves
c. ends
d. begin

109. a. will be able to (drive)

b. will have to (study)
c. will be able to (help you)
d. will not be allowed to (leave the room)
e. will want to (travel to South America)

110. a. leave
b. gets here
c. gets here
d. leaves
e. arrive
f. say

111. a. John probably won’t go to work tomorrow.

b. I am studying tomorrow. / I am going to study
tomorrow.
c. I will help you next week.
d. We should arrive at 3:00 P.M.
e. Teresa is traveling next week.
f. Ann might take a vacation in August. / Ann may
take a vacation in August. / Maybe Ann will take
a vacation in August.
g. Arthur won’t work in that place.
h. It will rain tomorrow.
i. She won’t have to return tonight.
j. I will be able to swim in three months.

112. a. will be playing

b. will be preparing
c. will be running
d. will be making
e. will be practicing

113. a. What will you be doing at four o’clock?

b. What will he be doing then?
c. What will she be doing that day?
d. What will you be doing this afternoon?
e. What will they be doing tomorrow evening?
 Answers 309

114. a. will have finished

b. will have sent
c. will have done
d. will have called
e. will have moved

115. a. Singing
b. traveling
c. getting lost
d. Traveling
e. driving
f. Waiting
9- going
h. talking

116. a. going
b. taking
c. working
d. telling
e. smoking

117. a. We want to go bowling.

b. They like to go fishing.
c. He has to go shopping.
d. She hates to go camping
e. She wants to go dancing,

118. a. What do you feel like doing?

b. Do you feel like swimming?
c. No. I felt like swimming yesterday.
d. Today I feel like dancing.

119. a. Would you mind taking off your hat?

b. Would you mind saving my seat?
c. Would you mind helping us?
d. Would you mind lending me $100?
e. Would you mind taking me home after the
meeting?

120. a. cleaning
b. driving
c. dancing
d. trying
e. training
f. running
310 Let’s Review

121. a. They appreciated her coming.

b. She regrets his resigning.
c. She loves his dancing.
d. They don’t like her singing.
e. His cooking is pretty good.

122. a. to lose
b. to learn
c. To manage
d. To forget
e. to hurt
f. to help
g- to use
h. to be
i. to study

123. a. to buy
b. to play
c. to marry
d. to finish
e. to stay
f. to save

124. a. I’m going to the store to buy milk.

b. They are going to Aisha’s house to see her.
c. Melissa is not strong enough to lift that box.
d. Danny is old enough to get his driver’s license.
e. It takes (me) twenty minutes to drive home.
f. It takes Jackie two hours to clean her room.
g. I am glad to hear your good news.
h. I am sorry to hear your bad news.

125. a. driving
b. to talk
c. take
d. to sleep
e. taking
f. go
g get up
h to wake up
i. waking up
 Answers 311

126. a. helping
b. to postpone
c. wash
d. to have
e. to learn
f. seeing
g- go
h. to talk
i. to drive
j. clean
k. to find
L. hearing
m. to tape
n. living
o. shopping
p. doing
q. working
r. losing

127. a. dancing
b. to call
c. to write
d. shopping
e. working
f. to earn
g. to find
h. to help
i. to graduate
j. to wear
k. wearing
L. listening or to listen

128. a. Molly asked, “Are you coming with us?”

b. Sam said, “I’m not going anywhere.”
c. “I will wait here,” he told her.
d. Then he added, “Don’t worry about me.”

129. a. was going

b. wanted
c. couldn’t
d. didn’t want
e. wanted
f. would bring
312 Let’s Review

130. a. had gone

b. had wanted
c. had done
d. had played
e. had brought

131. a. Steve said that Martha was clever.

b. Mrs. Adams said that Jessica wanted ice cream.
c. The children yelled that they couldn’t swim.
d. The lady reported that they hadn’t done it right.
e. Jerry said that he wasn’t going to drive.
f. Joan asked if Sam was going to work.
g. The reporter asked if they had finished yet.
h. He asked later when they were going to finish.
i. Dad asked where she had gone.

132. a. Ralph said, “I’m going home.”

b. “Are you tired?” asked Judy.
c. “I’m exhausted because I’ve been working all
day,” Ralph told her.
d. “You deserve a rest,” Judy replied.
e. “How many hours have you worked?” asked
Ralph.
f. “I have worked eight hours,” replied Judy.
g. “I think I will go home, too,” she said.

133. a. Do you know where her house is?

b. Do you know why she is leaving?
c. Do you know where Monica lives?
d. Do you know where Freddy bought that hat?

134. a. I don’t know who that lady is.

b. I don’t know when the party is.
c. I don’t know where the buses are.
d. I don’t know what Katrina does.
e. I don’t know why they went home.

135. a. Can you tell me where the president’s office is?

b. Can you tell me who her boyfriend is?
c. Can you tell me where Main Street is?
d. Can you tell me what time it is?
e. Can you tell me when they got here?
f. Can you tell me why they left?
g. Can you tell me when you are going to begin?
 Answers 313

136. a. where to go
b. how to get there
c. who(m) to call
d. when to leave

137. a. He is adorable, isn’t he?

b. We aren’t finished, are we?
c. She is afraid, isn’t she?
d. They are cold, aren’t they?
e. You like ice cream, don’t you?
f. He wants a drink, doesn’t he?
g. I haven’t been there, have I?
h. You have performed already, haven’t you?
i. He hasn’t called us, has he?
j. He was there, wasn’t he?
k. You went to the game, didn’t you?
L. He tried to help you, didn’t he?
m. They didn’t like the dessert, did they?
n. He hadn’t seen the movie, had he?
o. She had been working all day, hadn’t she?

138. a. David gives her money. / David gives it to her.

b. Helen draws him pictures. / Helen draws them
for him.
c. Sandra mentioned it to him.
d. Robin asked her a question.
e. Paul explains them to the students.
f. Richard built her a house. / Richard built it for her.

139. a. get
b. get
c. getting
d. getting
e. get
f. get getting
g. got
h. got

140. a. I’m going to have my hair cut.

b. We have our grass cut every week.
c. He has his oil changed regularly.
d. He has his shirts ironed.
e. She had her house cleaned last week.
f. We had the damage repaired last year.
g. We are going to have our house painted next
week.
314 Let’s Review

141. a. ask
b. ask for
c. lend
d. borrow
e. asking lend

142. a. talk
b. speaks
c. speak
d. talked

143. a. come bring take

b. come bring take
c. going
d. going taking brings

144. a. say
b. Tell
c. tells
d. says tell

145. a. do
b. do
c. makes
d. do make

146. a. wish
b. hope
c. wish
d. hoped
e. wish

147. a. looking at
b. watching
c. looks
d. looks like
e. look alike

148. a. I am not understood.

b. That teacher is loved.
c. These rugs are made in Iran.
d. She is cared for.
e. He is called a lot.
f. They are being helped.
 Answers 315

149. a. I was not understood.

b. That teacher was loved.
c. These rugs were made in Iran.
d. She was cared for.
e. He was called a lot.
f. They were being helped.
g. This poem was written in 1865.

150. a. I haven’t been understood.

b. She has been cared for.
c. He has been called a lot.
d. They have been helped.
e. The bank on the corner has been robbed.

151. a. Call me!

b. Send me a letter, John.
c. Don’t leave, Mom.
d. Don’t drive fast, Erin.
e. Let’s dance, Pat!
f. Let’s go to a movie.
g. Let’s not argue.
h. Let’s not play tennis today.

152. a. How do you start the machine?

b. How do you get to Center Street?
c. Where do you park?
d. How much do you have to pay to ride on the
metro?
e. Where can you mail letters?

153. a. You put a quarter in the slot and push the start
button.
b. You go straight ahead, then turn left.
c. You park on the street.
d. You mail your letters at the post office.

154. a. Adam to erase the blackboard.

b. Jessica to pick up the toys.
c. Amy and Lisa to put away the crayons.
d. David and Brian to put the chairs in place.
e. Reza to put the trash in the wastebasket.

155. a. She wanted him to erase the blackboard.

b. She wanted her to pick up the toys.
c. She wanted them to put away the crayons.
d. She wanted them to put the chairs in place.
e. She wanted him to put the trash in the wastebasket.
316 Let’s Review

156. a. that he be quiet

b. that we be responsible
c. that she be careful
d. that you come home
e. that he get a tutor

157. a. I wish I had a ticket.

b. I wish he went to school.
c. I wish she didn’t work on weekends.
d. I wish we had money.
e. I wish they didn’t leave their dirty dishes in the
sink.

158. a. wish they hadn’t gone home early,

b. wish you hadn’t called me at 6:00 A.M.
c. wish she hadn’t quit her job.
d. wish he hadn’t found out the truth,
e. wish we had told him in time.

159. a. I had a lot of money, I would take a trip to

Europe.
b. f she were here, I would dance with her.
c. f he had a diploma, he could get a job.
d. f we were lucky, we would win the lottery.

160. a. f I had had a lot of money, I would have taken a

rip to Europe.
b. f she had been here, I would have danced with
her.
c. f he had had a diploma, he could have gotten a
ob.
d. f we had been lucky, we would have won the
ottery.

161. a. f I walk, I get tired,

b. f he reads, he falls asleep,
c. f she drinks milk, she gets a stomach ache,
d. f he is awake, he watches T.V.

162. a. f I go home early, my wife will be happy,

b. f I get a vacation in August, I will go to Asia,
c. f he marries her, he will move to California,
d. f they buy that house, they will make a beautiful
garden.
e. If we move in February, we will give you our
furniture.
 Answers 317

163. a. If I went to the beach, I would buy a bathing suit.

b. If she bought that dress, she wouid have to lose
ten pounds.
c. If he won the lottery, he would buy a fabulous
new car.
d. If we took a trip around the world, we would visit
you.
e. If they got married, they would have a lot of
problems.

164. a. in
b. under
c. on
d. next to
e. behind
f. against

165. a. in
b. of
c. in
d. on
e. at

166. a. toward
b. away from
c. onto
d. through

167. a. in in on at in
b. since
c. for
d. at by
e. until for
f. on
g- at

168. a. in on
b. in on in

169. a. for at up
b. on
c. in in
318 Let’s Review

170. a. by
b. for
c. with by
d. from
e. in from
f. in of
9- by
h. without
i. from

171. a. Who(m) did you go to the movies with?

b. What is she thinking about?
c. What street do they live on?
d. What city does he live in?
e. Who(m) did you talk to?

172. a. at
b. for
c. to
d. with

173. a. in
b. by
c. on
d. in
e. in
f. With
g. on
h. on
i. in
j. in
k. at at

174. a. about
b. for
c. in / with
d. from
e. of
f. with
g. of
h. to
i. for
j. about
k. in / with
L. from
 Answers 319

175. a. about / of
b. about
c. at
d. of
e. with
f. to
g. on
h. to
i. with
j. for
k. in

176. a. watch out / look out

b. dropped off
c. got away
d. show up
e. hangs around
f. Keep out
g. start over
h. check in
i. get along
j. find out
k. get up
L. give up

177. a. Please throw it away.

b. Are you going to pay him back?
c. I wrote it down.
d. We will look into it.
e. You need to hand them in.
f. May I try it on?
g. I had to ask for it.
h. She had to clean it up.
i. He tried to do it over.
j. She likes to pick them out.
k. They ran out of them.
L. We will have to call them back.
m. Try to get over it.
n. They called it off.
o. Do you think you can catch up with them?

178. a. here
b. away
c. anywhere
d. upstairs
e. there downstairs high low everywhere
f. underneath
320 Let’s Review

179. a. late
b. ago
c. next week
d. soon
e. recently / lately
f. anymore
g- still

180. a. tonight
b. later
c. Then afterward / then

181. a. Today
b. Yesterday
c. the day before yesterday
d. Tomorrow
e. the day after tomorrow

182. a. This morning

b. this afternoon
c. this evening

183. a. last
b. this next
c. this next
d. last

184. a. once
b. again
c. times
d. twice

185. a. 25 percent of the time

b. 100 percent of the time
c. 5 percent of the time
d. 0 percent of the time
e. 80 percent of the time
f. 60 percent of the time

186. a. well
b. carefully
c. fast
d. quickly
e. easily
f. hard
g- busily
 Answers 321

h. ably
i. late
j. responsibly
k. early
L. badly
m. slowly
n. better than
o. more slowly than
p. faster than
q. more easily than
r. worse than
s. more carefully than
t. more quietly than
u. less capably than
v. the most responsibly
w. not as easily as
x. not as well as

187. a. hardly
b. really
c. somewhat / a little
d. almost

188. a. average
b. bad
c. better than average
d. excellent

189. a. I’m going outside.

b. He’s going to New York tomorrow.
c. Yes, they are still sleeping.
d. Yes, I have already finished.
e. No, I haven’t finished yet.
f. No, she doesn’t take lessons anymore.
g. She seldom practices.
h. They usually play in the afternoon.
i. Sometimes my friend calls me in the evening. /
My friend calls me in the evening sometimes.
j. He paints very well.
k. John is pretty tall.

190. a. and and

b. or
c. but
d. yet
e. and not only but also
322 Let’s Review

f. or
g. and
h. so
i. but
j. for

191. a. Kathleen is happy, and Glenn is too.

b. Jack works hard, and Mike does too.
c. Emily left yesterday, and Jeremy did too.
d. Val was cooking, and Renee was too.
e. Sue isn’t tired, and Joel isn’t either.
f. Kevin didn’t come, and Scott didn’t either.
g. Carolyn wasn’t driving, and Bob wasn’t either.
h. We didn’t see them, and Gayle didn’t either.

192. a. Kathleen is happy, and so is Glenn.

b. Jack works hard, and so does Mike.
c. Emily left yesterday, and so did Jeremy.
d. Val was cooking, and so was Renee.
e. Sue isn’t tired, and neither is Joel.
f. Kevin didn’t come, and neither did Scott.
g. Carolyn wasn’t driving, and neither was Bob.
h. We didn’t see them, and neither did Gayle.

193. a. both and

b. not only but also
c. neither nor
d. whether or not
e. either or

194. a. before
b. after until
c. While
d. because
e. so that
f. Although / Even though
g. rather than
h. although / even though

195. a. first
b. Second, / Next, / Then
c. Next, Then / After that,
d. Next, Then / After that,
e. Meanwhile
f. After
g. Finally
 Answers 323

196. a. and/as well as

b. In addition / Plus
c. Furthermore
d. On top of that
e. Moreover

197. a. she is a good friend of mine, (one possible

answer)
b. it’s the best pot roast I’ve ever had. (one possible
answer)
c. it was the most fun I’ve had for a long time.
(one possible answer)

198. a. on the other hand / in contrast

b. otherwise
c. nevertheless / still
d. but / however,
e. instead

199. a. in other words / that is

b. for example
c. specifically
d. I mean
e. that is / in other words

200. a. anyway
b. after all
c. after all
d. In any case

201. a. although / even though

b. even if
c. although / even though
d. even if

202. a. in the end

b. In summary / In short
c. In short
d. In conclusion

203. a. sixty-four
b. three hundred and seventy-seven
c. four thousand, five hundred and forty-one
d. twenty thousand, three hundred and two
e. four hundred thousand and one
f. six million, three hundred and twelve
324 Let’s Review

g. six and a half miles

h. one and three-quarter acres
i. ten dollars and thirty-four cents
j. five thousand, four hundred and twenty-eight
dollars and twenty-one cents
k. ten million dollars

204. a. Thursday is before Friday.

b. Wednesday is between Tuesday and Thursday.
c. Saturday and Sunday are the weekend.
d. August is before September.
e. April is after March.
f. Independence Day in the United States is on July
4th. / the Fourth of July.

205. a. It’s five o’clock.

b. It’s six-oh-five / It’s five after six. / It’s five past
six.
c. It’s seven-ten. / It’s ten after seven. / It’s ten
past seven.
d. It’s eight-fifteen. / It’s a quarter after eight. / It’s
a quarter past eight.
e. It’s nine-twenty. / It’s twenty after nine. / It’s
twenty past nine.
f. It’s ten-twenty-five. / It’s twenty-five after ten. /
It’s twenty-five past ten.
g. It’s eleven-thirty. / It’s half past eleven.
h. It’s twelve-thirty-five. / It’s twenty-five to one. /
It’s twenty-five of one.
i. It’s one-forty. / It’s twenty to two. / It’s twenty of
two.
j. It’s two-forty-five. / It’s a quarter to three. / It’s a
quarter of three.
k. It’s three-fifty. / It’s ten to four. / It’s ten of four.
L. It’s four-fifty-five. / It’s five to five. / It’s five of five.

206. a. pleasant weather

b. electricity in the sky
c. a flow of water over usually dry land
d. cold weather
e. a loud noise
f. winds over 75 miles per hour
g. hot weather
h. a circular storm
 Answers 325

207. a. It’s (nine) o’clock.

b. I’m (writ)ing.
c. I’m (tired).
d. I’m (tired) because I have been (study)ing.
e. I have answered (five) questions.
f. I’m going to (rest).
g. ! was (work)ing.
h. I was at (my office).
i. I arrived there at (8:30 A.M.).
j. (Shirley, the office manager,) was there.
k. She was (working at her computer).
L. She had been there (twenty minutes).
m. I ate lunch at (one-fifteen).
n. Yes, I had. / No, I hadn’t.
o. I was (happy).
p. I was happy because I had (finished all my work).
q. Yes, I did.
r. Yes, I am.
Appendix
Weights and Measures

Weights
U.S. Standard Weights Metric Equivalents
16 ounces = 1 pound .454 kilogram
(almost half of a kilogram)
2,000 pounds = 1 ton 907.18 kilograms
1.102 short tons 1 metric ton
Abbreviations
ounce = oz. pound = lb.

Liquid Measures
U.S. Standard Measures Metric Equivalents
1 cup 236 milliliters
2 cups = 1 pint 473 milliliters
2 pints = 1 quart .9464 liter
4 quarts = 1 gallon 3.7854 liters
Abbreviations
cup = C. quart = qt.
pint = pt. gallon = gal.

Dry Measures
U.S. Standard Measures Metric Equivalents
1 teaspoon 5 milliliters*
3 teaspoons = 1 tablespoon 15 milliliters*
14 cup 60 milliliters*
14 cup 120 milliliters*
Abbreviations
teaspoon = tsp. or t. cup = C.
tablespoon = T.

*These measurements are approximate.

327
328 Appendix

Linear Measures
U.S. Standard Measures Metric Equivalents
1 inch 2.54 centimeters
12 inches = 1 foot 30.48 centimeters
3 feet = 1 yard .9144 meter
5,280 feet = 1 mile 1.6 kilometers
Abbreviations
inch = in. or" yard = yd.
foot = ft. or' mile = m.

Square Measures
U.S. Standard Measures Metric Equivalents
43,560 square feet = 1 acre 4,047 square meters
640 acres = 1 square mile 2,590 square kilometers
Abbreviations
square feet = sq. ft. acre = ac.

Temperatures
U.S. Standard /Fahrenheit
For Weather: Celsius/Centigrade
-10 -23
0 -17
32 0
50 10
68 20
86 30
104 40

Normal Body Temperature:

98.6 37

For Cooking:
212 (boiling point of water) 100
250 (low oven) 121
325 163
350 (moderate oven) 177
375 190
400 204
450 232
500 260
Abbreviations
° = degrees F = Fahrenheit C = Celsius or Centigrade
 Common Abbreviations 329

Common Abbreviations

Time Expressions
A. D. anno Domini— the years counted for present time
B. C. before Christ—the years counted backwards from
present time
A.M. ante meridiem— before twelve o’clock noon
P.M. post meridiem—after twelve o’clock noon

Personal Titles
Mr. the title for a man
Mrs. the title for a married woman
Miss the title for an unmarried woman or young girl
Ms. the business title for a woman
Dr. the title for a man or woman with an earned
doctorate degree
Rev. the title for a member of the clergy
Sr. senior—used after a man’s name when his son has
the same name
Jr. junior—used after a man’s name when his father
has the same name
Ph.D. Doctor of Philosophy—used after the name of a
person who has earned that degree
M. D. Doctor of Medicine—used after the name of a
medical doctor
D.D.S. Doctor of Dental Surgery—used after the name of
a dentist
LL.D. Doctor of Laws—used after the name of a lawyer
who has earned that degree
Note: Choose one title or the other: Dr. Donald Lawrence
or Donald Lawrence, M.D.

For Report Writing

cf. confer— compare
e.g. exempli gratia—tor example
et al. el alii— and others
etc. et cetera—and so forth
i.e. idest— that is
N. B. nota bene— note well
330 Appendix

Irregular Verb Forms

Basic Form Past Tense Form Past Par
be was, were been
become became become
bear bore born
beat beat beaten
begin began begun
bend bent bent
bet bet bet
bind bound bound
bite bit bitten
bleed bled bled
blow blew blown
break broke broken
breed bred bred
bring brought brought
build built built
burst burst burst
buy bought bought
catch caught caught
choose chose chosen
cling clung clung
come came come
cost cost cost
creep crept crept
cut cut cut
deal dealt dealt
do did done
dig dug dug
draw drew drawn
drink drank drunk
drive drove driven
eat ate eaten
fall fell fallen
feed fed fed
feel felt felt
fight fought fought
find found found
fit fit fit
flee fled fled
fly flew flown
forbid forbade forbidden
forget forgot forgotten
forgive forgave forgiven
forsake forsook forsaken
freeze froze frozen
get got gotten
give gave given
go went gone
grind ground ground
grow grew grown
hang hung hung
 Irregular Verb Forms 331

Basic Form Past Tense Form Past Pc

have had had
hear heard heard
hide hid hidden
hit hit hit
hold held held
hurt hurt hurt
keep kept kept
know knew known
lay laid laid
lead led led
leave left left
lend lent lent
let let let
lie lay lain
light lit lit
lose lost lost
make made made
mean meant meant
meet met met
mistake mistook mistaken
pay paid paid
put put put
quit quit quit
read read read
rid rid rid
ride rode ridden
ring rang rung
rise rose risen
run ran run
say said said
see saw seen
seek sought sought
sell sold sold
send sent sent
set set set
shake shook shaken
shed shed shed
shine shone shone
shoot shot shot
show showed shown
shrink shrank shrunk
shut shut shut
sing sang sung
sit sat sat
sleep slept slept
slide slid slid
sling slung slung
slit slit slit
speak spoke spoken
speed sped sped
spend spent spent
spin spun spun
split split split
332 Appendix

Basic Form Past Tense Form Past Participle

spread spread spread
spring sprang sprung
stand stood stood
steal stole stolen
stick stuck stuck
sting stung stung
stink stank stunk
strike struck struck
strive strove striven
swear swore sworn
sweep swept swept
swim swam swum
swing swung swung
take took taken
teach taught taught
tear tore torn
tell told told
think thought thought
throw threw thrown
understand understood understood
upset upset upset
wake up woke up waked up
wear wore worn
weave wove woven
weep wept wept
win won won
wind wound wound
withdraw withdrew withdrawn
wring wrung wrung
write wrote written
Index

a/an 55, 56 with prepositions 148-154

a few 51 adverbs 18, 81-82, 92, 102, 170-179
a good deal of 63 adverbial phrase 82-83
a little 52 of frequency 174
a lot 52 of instance 174
a lot of 62 of location 170-171
a lot 51 of manner 175-176
AD. 18 of time 171-173
AM. 18, 203 advice 87-88
abbreviations 18-19, 327, 328, 329 after AAA, 161, 164, 172, 184
ability 85-86, 110 after all A 92
about AAA, 148, 154-155, 161 after that 98, 186-187
above 141 afterwards 171
across 143, 164, 170 again A 74
across from 141 against AAA
active voice 73 ago 98, 171
actually 187-189, 191 ahead of AAA
adding a correction 191 alike 40-41
adding a reason 193-194 all 52, 63
adding an explanation 191-192 almost A 78
adding consequences 191 along A A3, 159
adding information 187-189 already 96, 106-107, 171, 173
adding information to reduce importance also A 87-189
192 although A 94
adding information to the contrary always 91, 174
189-190 among AAA
adjectives 17, 54-72 and 180, 181-182, 187-189
comparing 66-70 another 53, 61
compound 66 answers to exercises 288-325
descriptive 63-71, 116-117 answers, short 76, 122-123
nouns used as 64 any 50, 61
order 71 anybody A3, 72
possessive 60 anymore 171
prepositions used as 65 anyone 49, 72
proper 64 anything 50, 72
superlative 70 anywhere 50, 72, 170
verbs used as 65 anyhow A 92

333
334 Index

anyway 192 both 51,62, 183

apostrophe 22, 36-37, 47, 75 brea/c + prepositions 166
apostrophe s 36-37, 47 bring 127-128
appositives 36 bring + prepositions 166
around 143, 144, 159 but 180-181, 182-183, 189-190
articles 55-59 by 141, 143, 144, 145, 148, 149, 159,
as 101,146 170
as if 185 by one's se/f 146
as... as 69 by then 106
as a matter of fact 187-189, 191 calendar dates 201-202
as a result 191 can 85-87, 110
as well as 187-189 care + prepositions 166
ask 127 carry + prepositions 166
ask for 127 catch + prepositions 166
assistance 87, 110 Celsius 328
aM42, 144-145, 148, 155, 198 Centigrade 328
at any rate 192 certainly 193
at present 145 cf. 19
at the moment 145 chronological order 186-187
away 159, 161, 170 close 170
B.C. 18 close + prepositions 166
back 161 close to 142
bac/c to 143 colon 22
be 27, 63, 75-78, 90-92, 98-99, come 118, 127-128
101-102, 107, 108, 111, 112, 122, come + prepositions 166
123, 132-133, 137, 138, 182-183, comma 21
201-206 commands 28, 134-135
be able to 100 commitments 110
be going to 105, 108-109 comparisons 38-41
be used to 117 complement 24
because 83, 193 concession 194
before 95-96, 98, 106, 144, 171, 172, condition 194
184 conjunctions 18, 180-185
behind 141, 170 consequently 191
belong to 131 consider 118
be/owl 41, 170 consonants 17
beneath 141 contractions 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 82,
beside 141 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 95-57, 98,
besides 187-189 99, 100, 101, 106, 107, 110, 111,
better 177 122-123
between 141 coordinating conjunctions 180-181
beyond 142 correlative conjunctions 183
billions 199 could 87, 100
b/ow + prepositions 165 -d, -ed, -ied 65, 73, 74, 99
borrow 127 D.D.S. 19
 Index 335

dash 22 fall + prepositions 166

days 201 far 170
decimals 200 far from 142
demonstratives 60-61 fast 175
depend on 131 feel like 114
descriptive adjectives 54, 63-71 few 51,62
desire 89, 110 fewer than 39
did 99-100 finally 97, 106-107, 186-187
direct object 24, 81, 136, 175-176 f/rsf 186-187
direct object pronouns 43-44, for 95, 106, 144, 146, 149-150, 155,
115-116 164, 181
discourse markers 186-194 for example 192
do 78-85, 99, 122-123, 129, 182-183 for instance 192
do + prepositions 166 forget 117
down 143, 160, 161, 170 fractions 199
downstairs 170 frequency 174
Dr. 19 frequently 174
drop + prepositions 166 from 143, 145, 150, 156, 164
during 144 furthermore 187-189
e.g. 19 future perfect progressive tense 112
each 50, 61 future perfect tense 112
each other 45-46 future progressive tense 111
early 171, 175, 176 future time 108
-ed 64, 74 future time, present progressive tense
-ed,-en 95-97 108
either 50, 51,52, 61, 182, 183 future time, present tense 111
else 71-72 gerunds 113, 116-118
emphasizing the truth 193 gerunds vs. infinitives 116-119
enough 51,52, 62, 72, 115 get 126, 127
equality 40-41 get + prepositions 166-167
-er, -/er 66-67, 176-177 give + prepositions 167
-est, -iest 70, 177 go 127-128
et al. 19 go + gerund 113-114
etc. 19 go + prepositions 167
ever? if 194 going to 108-109
even though 194 had 106-107, 120-121, 123, 139-140
ever 95-96, 106 had better 87-88
every 61 had to 100
everywhere 170 half 199
except 146 hand+ prepositions 167
exclamation point 21 hang + prepositions 167
exercises 209-287 hard 175
extremely 179 hardly 91, 102, 178
Fahrenheit 328 hardly ever 174
fe/r/y 179 have 95-97, 112, 123, 126-127
336 Index

have + prepositions 167 in summary 195

have been 97 in the end 195
have to 88-89, 110 in the first place 186-187
he 42 in the meantime 186-187
hear+ prepositions 167 in time 145
help 118 included questions and statements
her 43, 44, 45 121-122
here 170, 171 indeed 189, 193
hers 47 independent clauses 181-183
herself 46-47 indicative mood 73
high 170 indirect objects 24, 124-125, 128-129
him 43, 44, 45 indoors 170
himself 46-47 infinitives 73, 114-119, 136
his 47 infinitives vs. gerunds 116-119
hope 129-130 -ing 65, 74, 90-92, 97, 101-102, 108,
how 27 111, 112, 113
how + adjective 27 inside 142, 170
/?ow + adverb 27 instance 174
how come 27 instead 190
how many 27, 59, 62 instead of 146
how much 27, 63 instructions 134-135
however 189-190 into 143, 164
hundreds 198 it 42, 43, 44, 45
hyphen 22 it as subject 23, 115, 205-206
/ mean 191 it takes 115
/42 itself 46-47
i.e. 19 Jr. 19
idioms, verb-preposition 165-169 just 97, 106, 178
/7139, 140, 185 /ceep + prepositions 167
illustrating a point 189 kick + prepositions 167
imperative mood 73, 134-135 /as/ 98, 172
in 142, 144-145, 148, 150-151, 156, late 171, 175
159, 161, 164, 170, 201,202 /a/e/y 171
in addition 187-189 later 171
in any case 192 /east 70
in back 170 lend 127
in back of 141 /ess + adjective 67
in conclusion 195 /ess than 39
in contrast 190 let’s 135
in fact 187—189, 191 letters of the alphabet 17
in front 170 letters, capital 20
in front of 141 letters, lower case 20
in other words 191 letters, upper case 20
in short 195 like 40-41,81
in spite of the fact that 194 little 52, 62, 72
 Index 337

live + prepositions 167 nearly 178

LL.D. 19 necessity 88, 110
location, adverbs of 170-171 neither 50, 51, 52, 62, 182, 183
look 130 never 95-96, 106-107, 174
look + prepositions 168 nevertheless 190
look alike 130 nex/108, 172-173, 186-187
look at 130 next to 141
look like 130-131 no one 50, 72
lots of 62 no 61
low 170 nobody 49, 72
-ly, -ily 175-176 none 51,52
M.D. 19 non-progressive verbs 92-94
make 118, 129 not any 51
many 51,52, 62-63 not anymore 91, 102
may 86-87, 109, 110 not as 66-69, 176, 177
may have 100 no/ many 51
maybe 86, 109 not much 72
me 43, 44, 45 not only 183
meanwhile 186-187 nothing 50, 72
measures 327-328 noun determiners 30, 31-32, 34-35,
metric equivalents 327-328 54, 55-63, 71
might 86-87, 109 nouns 17, 29-41, 71
might have 100 collective 29
millions 198-199 comparing 38-41
mine 47 count 29-32
Miss 18 non-count 32-35, 63
modal verbs 85-90, 109-110, 132-133 non-count comparing 39
modal verbs, past tense 100-101 plural 30-32, 63
momentarily 171 plural comparing 38-39
money 200 possessive 36-38
more 176 proper 35-36
more + adjective 67 singular 29-30, 63
more than 38-39 used as adjectives 64
moreover 187-189 now 171
most 70 nowhere 50,170
Mr. 18 numbers 51,59-60, 197-199
Mrs. 18 cardinal 59, 197-199, 202
Ms. 18 fractions 199
much 63 ordinal 59-60, 202
must 88-89, 110 whole 197-199
must have 100-101 object pronouns 43
myself 46-47 objects 83-85, 114-116, 132-133
A/a. 19 indirect 124-125, 128-129
naturally 193 occasionally 174
near 142, 170 oM46, 151-152, 157, 164
338 Index

of all 70 past tense 98-101

of course 193 modals 100-101
of the 37-38 perfect subjunctive 139-140
off A 42, 144, 159, 162, 165 period 21
often 174 permission 86-87, 110
on 142, 144-145, 148, 152, 157, Ph.D. 19
161-162, 165, 202 pick + prepositions 168
on the other hand 190 plenty 62
on time 145 plural subjects 23
on top of that 187-189 plus 187-189
once 95-96, 106, 174 possession 36-38, 60, 77, 114
one 49, 50 possessives 114
one another 45-46 possibility 86, 109-110
only 178 predicate of sentence 24
onto 144 predictions 110
opposite 141 preference 89
or 180 prepositional phrases 81,82, 92, 141
order, chronological 186-187 prepositions 17, 114, 141-169
other 53, 61 in questions 145
others 51,53 of direction 143-144
otherwise 190 of place 141-142
ought to 87-88 of time 144-145
ours 47 used as adjectives 65
ourselves 46-47 with nouns 147-148
out 159—160, 162-163, 170 with pronouns 44
out for 165 present participle 73, 90-92, 94, 97,
out of 142, 143, 164-165 101-102, 107
outdoors 170 present perfect progressive tense 97
outside 170 present perfect tense 95-97
outside of 142 present progresive tense 90-92, 94
over 141, 160, 163, 165, 170 for future 108
P.M. 18, 203 present subjunctive 137-138
parentheses 22 present tense 75-90
participle, past 73, 95-97, 100, present tense for future 111
106-107, 112, 132-133 pretty 179
participle, present 73, 90-92, 94, 97, probability 89
101-102, 107 probably 109
parts of speech 17-18 prohibition 88
pass + prepositions 168 promises 110
passive voice 73, 132-133 pronouns 17, 42-53
past 143, 170 after prepositions 44
past participle 73, 95-97, 100, demonstrative 48-49
106-107, 112, 132-133 direct object 43-44
past perfect progressive tense 107 impersonal 43
past subjunctive 138-139 indefinite 49-53
 Index 339

indirect object + direct object 45 interrogative 25-27

indirect object 44-45 several 51
intensive 46 shall 135
object 43-44 she 42
possessive 47 should 87-88, 109
reciprocal 45-46 should have 100
reflexive 46-47 show + prepositions 168
relative 48 since 95, 97, 106, 144, 193-194
subject 42 singular subjects 23
proper adjectives 64 so 181, 182, 191, 195
proper nouns 57 so far 96, 106
punctuation 21-22 some 51,52, 62
put + prepositions 168 some time 108
question mark 21 somebody 50, 72
questions 25-27 someone 50, 72
tag 122-123 something 50, 72
quite 179 sometime 173
quite a bit 62 sometimes 174
quotation marks 22, 119-120 somewhat 178
quoted and reported speech 119 somewhere 50, 72
R.S.V.P. 19 soon 108, 171
rarely 174 speak 127
rather 179 specifically 192
rather than 185 Sr. 19
really 91, 102, 178, 193 stand + prepositions 168-169
recently 171 still 91, 102, 171, 173, 190
refusals 110 stop 117
remember 117 subjects 23, 83-85, 114, 132-133
reported speech 119-121 subjunctive mood 73, 137-140
requests 110, 114 subordinating conjunctions 184-185
Rev. 19 subsequently 186-187
run + prepositions 168 suggestions 134-135
-s, -es, -ies 30-31,79 summarizing 195
same 40-41 supposed to 115
say 128 tag questions 122-123
scarcely 178 take 127-128
second 186-187 with prepositions 169
see + prepositions 168 talk 127
seldom 174 tear + prepositions 169
semi-colon 21 tell 128
sentence types 25-28 temperatures 328
sentences 23-28 test 209-287
declarative 25 than 68, 176
exclamatory 27 that 49, 61
imperative 28 tf?af/s 191
340 Index

that one 49 under 141, 170

the 55-59 underneath 141, 170
the other 61 unless 184
theirs 47 until 144, 184
them 43, 44, 45 unusually 179
themselves 46-47 op 143, 160, 163, 170, 171
then 98, 171, 186-187 up to 144
there 170 upon 142
there are 78 upstairs 170
there is 77-78 i/s 43, 44, 45
therefore 191 used to 105, 117
toese 49, 61 usually 174
they 42, 43 verb-preposition idioms 165-169
think + prepositions 169 verbs 17, 73-140
to/s 49, 60, 172 active voice 73
to/s one 49 auxiliary 27
those 49, 61 be 27
thousands 198 future perfect progressive tense 112
through 143, 144, 160, 163, 170 future perfect tense 112
throw + prepositions 169 future progressive tense 111
thus 191 future time 108-112
tie + prepositions 169 gerunds 113
time 203-204 imperative mood 73, 134-135
time abbreviations 18 indicative mood 73
times 174 infinitives 73, 114-119
titles for people 18-19 intransitive 25
to 143, 152-153, 157-158 irregular past participles 330-332
to + verb 73, 114-119 irregular past tense 330-332
to top it all off 187-189 linking 24, 80
today 171 modal auxiliaries 85-90
tomorrow MA, 172 non-progressive 92-94, 102-104
tonight MA passive voice 73, 132-133
too 115, 179, 182 past perfect progressive tense 107
too many 52, 63 past perfect tense 106-107
too much 52, 63 past progressive tense 101-102
toward 143 past tense 98-101
trillions 199 present participle 90-92, 97,
try 117 101-102, 107, 111
with prepositions 169 present perfect progressive tense 97
turn + prepositions 169 present perfect tense 95-97
twice 95-96, 106, 174 present progressive tense 90-92
two-word verbs 159-169 present tense 75-90
inseparable 164-165 quoted and reported speech 119-121
intransitive 159-160 subjunctive mood 73, 137-140
separable 160-163 two-word 159-169
 Index 341

used as adjectives 65 whether 183, 184, 185

used as nouns 113, 114 which 26, 48, 48-49, 56
with prepositions 154-169 which one, which ones 48-49
verifying information 193 while 102, 184
very 179 who 26, 42, 48
vowels 17 who e/se 71
was 98-99 whom 26, 43, 44, 45, 48
with -ing 120-121 whose 26, 36, 48
watch 130 why 26
we 42 will 87, 109-112, 140
wear + prepositions 169 w/sh 129-130, 138
weather 205-206 with 145, 148, 153-154, 158, 165
weights 327 within 142
well 175-176 without 146
well enough 178 would 87,105-106, 120-121, 139-140
were 98-99, 123 would have 139-140
what 26, 27, 43, 48, 56, would like 89, 110
what else 72 would rather 89-90
whaf for 26 yesterday 171
whaf kind of 48, 72 yet 96, 97, 106, 171, 173, 181
whaf time 204 you 42, 43, 44, 45, 135
when 26, 184 yours 47
where 26 yourself 46-47
where e/se 71 yourselves 46-47
 ■

t
BOSTON PUBLIC LIBRARY
 ■sssfgats
y
■

ISBN-13: 978-0-7641-3546-0
ISBN-10: 0-7641-3546-5
5 1 4 9 9>

9 780764 135460
$14.99 Canada $18.75
www.barronseduc.com